<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Marycooch</id>
	<title>MoodleDocs - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Marycooch"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/Special:Contributions/Marycooch"/>
	<updated>2026-05-08T16:43:39Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.43.5</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Multitopic_course_format&amp;diff=140747</id>
		<title>Multitopic course format</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Multitopic_course_format&amp;diff=140747"/>
		<updated>2024-01-28T11:20:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox plugin&lt;br /&gt;
|type = Course format&lt;br /&gt;
|entry = N/A&lt;br /&gt;
|tracker = https://github.com/james-cnz/moodle-format_multitopic/issues&lt;br /&gt;
|discussion = https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=394619&lt;br /&gt;
|maintainer = [[User:James Calder|James Calder]]&lt;br /&gt;
|float = right&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Information about this  plugin can be found in the [https://github.com/james-cnz/moodle-format_multitopic/wiki Multitopic course format documentation.]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sitenotice&amp;diff=140743</id>
		<title>MediaWiki:Sitenotice</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sitenotice&amp;diff=140743"/>
		<updated>2022-11-28T12:15:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: link to latest supported docs&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;-&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Note: You are currently viewing documentation for Moodle 3.10. Up-to-date documentation for the latest stable version of Moodle may be available here: &#039;&#039;&#039;[[:en:{{NAMESPACE}}:{{PAGENAME}}|{{PAGENAME}}]].&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Gapfill_question_type&amp;diff=140670</id>
		<title>Gapfill question type</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Gapfill_question_type&amp;diff=140670"/>
		<updated>2022-01-06T10:54:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questions}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Infobox plugin&lt;br /&gt;
|type = question type&lt;br /&gt;
|entry = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qtype_gapfill&lt;br /&gt;
|tracker = https://github.com/marcusgreen/moodle-qtype_gapfill/issues&lt;br /&gt;
|discussion = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qtype_gapfill&lt;br /&gt;
|maintainer = [[user:Marcus Green|Marcus Green]]&lt;br /&gt;
|float = right&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installing this question type==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the generic [[Installing plugins]] documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Gapfill Question Type ==&lt;br /&gt;
All you need to learn to get started with this question type is the contents of one 7 word sentence as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Put square braces around the missing words&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the programmers and mathematicians, don&#039;t worry that it says square braces, you can use other delimiters on a per question basis. The classic example of a question is a question where the text reads. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;The [cat] sat on the [mat]&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Which will create a question with two gaps where the answers are cat and mat. Although it was designed with the idea of single missing words it will accept a sequence of words with spaces between them in the gaps. This type of question can be particularly useful for teaching languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Example questions available ==&lt;br /&gt;
Over 500 example questions are available for re-use and modification under a creative commons license. The examples are installed with the question type but the latest versions of these can be found at &lt;br /&gt;
https://github.com/marcusgreen/moodle-qtype_gapfill/tree/master/examples/en. There are two files, gapfill_examples.xml  has about 20 questions containing examples of how to use the features of the question type. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other file,  english_language.xml is aimed at people teaching english and is broken into approximately 31 categories such as irregular verbs, tenses etc, each question includes tags.  This is a companion file to the additional 100 English questions that ships with the Wordselect question type&lt;br /&gt;
https://github.com/marcusgreen/moodle-qtype_wordselect/tree/master/examples/en&lt;br /&gt;
These files are in xml format, instructions on how to import  them can be found here &lt;br /&gt;
[[Import_questions#Importing_questions_from_an_existing_file]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:gapfill_edit11.png|Gapfill Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default the student will see the questions in dragdrop mode where they can use the mouse to drag the answers from a displayed list into the matching field. When a student is answering one of these questions javascript only updates the text contents of the field, so even in this mode it is possible to type the answers into the field. As of version 1.4 it was updated to work with touch devices such as tablets and mobile phones and this post in the forum shows how it works with a wide range of devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=251406#p1092014&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==At Runtine==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:gfruntime.jpg|Gapfill runtime]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing the display answer options allows the question to be presented with either no prompts or dropdown lists. Here is where you can make that change&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:displayoptions.png|Display answer config]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is how the same question will appear with dropdown lists.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:dropdowns.png|Gapfill with dropdowns]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a drop down list of alternative delimiting characters ## {} and @@ which will allow a question in the form The {cat} sat on the {mat}. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to select dropdown or gapfill mode. Dropdown shows a list of all possible answers in each field and gapfill shows only an empty field with no list of options to select.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default marking is not case sensitive. So if the student enters CAT in a field of the form [cat] it will be considered correct. The editing form has an option to make the marking process case sensitive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each (correct) field is worth exactly 1 mark, so The [cat] sat on the [mat] has a maximum possible score of 2 marks. There is no concept of negative marking. The question supports the standard [[Question behaviours|behaviours]], hinting and combined feedback options. If an incorrect answer is entered and if display right answer has been selected in the quiz review options the correct answer will be shown next to the gap within braces as in the following screen shot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:gapfill_correct_answer2.png|Gapfill complete]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The editing form offers a field for adding wrong or distractor options. These only make sense in dragdrop or dropdown mode. Wrong answers must be entered as a comma delimited list and a shuffled list of correct and incorrect answers will be displayed with the question. If you need commas to appear in your distractors they can be escaped with a backslash \,&lt;br /&gt;
==Display Answers checkboxes==&lt;br /&gt;
Because only certain combinations of the checkboxes are logical, the checkboxes will become enabled/disabled according to the dropdown selected. So for example it makes no sense to have single use draggable selected with dropdown questions. This animation shows the checkboxes being enabled/disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:gapfill_checkboxes2.gif|Checkboxes changing with dropdown selection]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Options After Text==&lt;br /&gt;
This setting only makes a difference in dragdrop mode. It positions the draggable answer options after the body of the text instead of above it. This can be useful where the gaps are at the end of an explanatory block of text. It means the answers do not have to be dragged as far and is useful on smaller screens such as mobile devices as it reduces the need for screen scroll.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:optionsaftertext2.png|Checkbox to display options after text]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Single use draggables==&lt;br /&gt;
This only applies to drag drop mode. When a draggable option is dropped into a gap it is removed from the list. This can be useful to simplify the selection of answer options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:single_use_draggables.png|Single use draggables]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Letter Hints==&lt;br /&gt;
This setting only applies when the Interactive with multiple tries behaviour is used. Click the &#039;show more&#039; options under the More options heading to see this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:letterhints2.png|Checkbox to set letter hints]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a student gives an incorrect response they will be given incrementing letters from the correct answer when they press try again. So if the correct response is cat and the student responds with dog, on the next attempt that gap will contain c, and if they the respond with mouse, on the next response the gap will contain ca etc etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==In the Mobile App==&lt;br /&gt;
If you access a quiz with the mobile app that contains Gapfill questions it will be automatically loaded as a remote addon. The selection of &amp;quot;draggables&amp;quot;  follows the pattern set by the core [[Drag and drop into text question type]]. Instead of dragging answers into gaps, the answer will be clicked to select and then a gap will be clicked to drop into. Clicking away from an answer and into a gap will allow a gap to be cleared. In the screen shot the word New has been selected ready to drop into the second gap.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mobile_gapfill4.png|Gapfill in Moodle mobile]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Regular Expressions==&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to use regular expressions in answers, for example if you wanted both the US and UK spelling of colour as an answer you could add a field with the broken bar operator to act as an OR as in   &amp;quot;What [color|colour] is the sky?&amp;quot;. You can search for any string that starts with c and ends with r as &amp;quot;What [c.*r] is the sky&amp;quot;. More complex regular expressions should also work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could use regular expressions to mitigate common spelling errors, e.g. {cal[e|a]ndar} (note the selection of alternative delimiters to get around the use of the square brackets in the operator. This question type makes no attempt to check the validity of your regular expressions. You can read more about using regular expressions in the documentation for the PReg type see&lt;br /&gt;
[[Preg_question_type]] and also&lt;br /&gt;
[[Regular_Expression_Short-Answer_question_type]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Show Correct Responses ==&lt;br /&gt;
In interactive mode  (set in the [[Question behaviours|question behaviour]] of the quiz) it is possible to have a question indicate the number of questions that are correct and for this to be displayed for each field. This takes the form of red/green background colour and a tick or cross. To make this happen check the &amp;quot;show number of correct responses option&amp;quot; in the hint field under the multiple tries option. Note, that if you have given an incorrect answer it will not show what the correct answer is. You can of course put in the text of the whole including all correct answer into the &amp;quot;For any partially correct response&amp;quot; text area in the combined feedback section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:hints.jpg|hints r]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==No Duplicates Mode ==&lt;br /&gt;
This allows a question in the form Name three examples of X. So you could ask &amp;quot;Name the colours of medals awarded in the Olympic Games&amp;quot;. The syntax of the question fields would be [gold|silver|bronze] three times. Note the separator is the broken bar character which acts as an OR operator. Make sure you select gapfill mode for this type of question, otherwise you will have confusing draggable prompts appearing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By checking the No duplicates box in the question editing form, when it comes to marking any duplicates will be discarded. Correct answers will still be displayed with a green check/tick (as they are actually correct), but marks will only be awarded for the first occurrence of the selection. As of version 1.1, when this happens the background of the duplicated values will be displayed in yellow and a message added to the feedback will say &amp;quot;Credit is partial because you have duplicate answers&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:duplicate_gapfill.png|Duplicate answers]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tables with category columns==&lt;br /&gt;
By combining No duplicates mode with the | (or) operator it is possible to create tables with category columns. So in the following screen shot there are two distinct gaps containing [lion|tiger] [dog|wolf] but these are duplicated to allow for all four answers. These are then placed in a table to allow the student to drag into the appropriate category columns.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:gapfill_categories.gif|Gapfill Categories]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;This screen shot shows how the question text appears in the editor. Note that the shading for the heading row is done by including &amp;lt;th&amp;gt; tags for the first row instead of &amp;lt;td&amp;gt; tags and by setting the class table tag as &amp;amp;lt;table class=gapfilltable&amp;amp;gt;, The gapfilltable class is supplied in the css for the question type.&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using the HTML editor, switch to HTML mode and paste in the following code as an example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table class=&amp;quot;gapfilltable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; rules=&amp;quot;rows&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tbody&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th&amp;gt;Feline&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th&amp;gt;Canine&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[tiger|lion]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[dog|wolf]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[tiger|lion]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[dog|wolf]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tbody&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Tables with images==&lt;br /&gt;
Tables with images can be used to create a question where the student must drag the word into the gap next to the appropriate picture&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:fruit2.png|Tables with images]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table class=&amp;quot;gapfilltable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tbody&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;img src=&amp;quot;http://apple.png&amp;quot; alt=&amp;quot;&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;50&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;51&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[apple]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;img src=&amp;quot;http://pear.png&amp;quot; alt=&amp;quot;&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;58&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;55&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[pear]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tbody&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Gapfill crossword==&lt;br /&gt;
It is a bit of a fiddle but it is not wildly difficult. You might also be able to do this with [[Embedded Answers (Cloze) question type|the core Cloze question type]], but the source text would probably be a bit ugly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Gapfill crossword.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to make the above crossword you would need to:&lt;br /&gt;
* Write in paper (preferably using a lined or graph paper) the completed crossword.&lt;br /&gt;
* Make a new Gapfill question instance&lt;br /&gt;
* Type the relevant instructions (if necessary)&lt;br /&gt;
* Type the Across and Down definitions of the words that the user must guess.&lt;br /&gt;
* Build a table with the proper number of rows and columns.&lt;br /&gt;
* Leave the empty table cells empty.&lt;br /&gt;
* Populate the interesting parts of the table with either &lt;br /&gt;
** a fixed character (if you will be helping the reader, as most crosswords do) &lt;br /&gt;
** or each character to be guessed enclosed within square brackets.&lt;br /&gt;
* Save your question and preview&lt;br /&gt;
* Fix mistakes (if present)&lt;br /&gt;
* Try as a student&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is the HTML code that was used to create that example. Note that the gapfillcol class ships with the question type and sets the light grey background among other things. It is probably easiest to create the table/grid using the Moodle built in Atto editor and then tweak the HTML code afterwards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table class=&amp;quot;text-center gapfillcol&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tbody&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[T]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[M]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[U]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[L]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[O]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[N]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[D]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[O]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[N]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[O]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[E]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt; 4  &amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[W]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[I]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[N]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[E]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tbody&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Disable Regex ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Gapfill question uses regular expressions by default to compare the answer given by a user with the correct answer stored in the database. There are times where it is more convenient to turn this off and use plain string comparisons. This is true where the answer text contains characters that have a special meaning in regular expressions such as &amp;lt; &amp;gt; * . / \. This can be done by checking the Disable Regex option in the More options section as in the screen shot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:disableregex3.png |Disable Regex]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Fixed Gapsize==&lt;br /&gt;
When this is checked all gaps will be set to the size of the largest gap. If the gap includes the or operator | the size will be set to the widest of the words used.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:fixedgapsize.png |Fixed Gap size checkbox]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Letter Hints==&lt;br /&gt;
This setting only has an effect when the [[Question behaviours|interactive with multiple tries question behaviour]] is selected and when hints have been added to the question. If a student submits an incorrect answer the first letter of the correct answer will be added. If they submit another incorrect answer first two letters of the correct answer will be added and this continues for the number of hints that are added for the question.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:gapfill_letter_hints.png|Letter Hints]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Double Not ==&lt;br /&gt;
The use of !! indicates that a gap can be left empty and considered a correct response.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is of particular use with the | or operator where one or more answers or a blank will be considered correct e.g. [cat|dog|!!].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is illustrated in a new sample question in the sample_questions.xml files shipped with this question type called &amp;quot;Correct_empty_gaps with !!&amp;quot; As part of this change the calculation of maximum score per question instance has been modified, so a question with &amp;quot;The [cat] sat on the [!!]&amp;quot; will be worth two marks in total one for entering cat and one for leaving the second gap blank. This is necessary to ensure that if a value is put in the [!!] space a mark will be lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Extended Characters==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gapfill will only work with characters that will display in a standard HTML form. This means it will not render any [[HTML]] or [[LaTeX]]. It should be possible to display [[Unicode|unicode]] characters such as these examples of &amp;quot;powers&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What is ten to the power 3?[10³]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What is ten to the power 4?[10⁴]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What is ten to the power 5?[10⁵] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What is ten to the power 6?[10⁶]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What is ten to the power 7?[10⁷]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What is ten to the power 8?[10⁸ ]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What is ten to the power 9?[10⁹]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:tenpower.png|extended characters]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: You &#039;&#039;can use some HTML codes&#039;&#039; inside gapfill questions, but you must first click on the &amp;lt;&amp;gt; button to show HTML code. Please note  that you could actually type most of these codes directly. The following HTML codes are available:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; - non-breaking space i.e. a space but there will never be a line-break inserted instead of this space at the end of a line&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;amp&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; - ampersand sign (&amp;amp;)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;apos&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; - apostrophe sign (&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;copy&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; - copyright sign (©)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;plusmn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; - &amp;quot;plus or minus&amp;quot; sign (±)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; - multiply sign (*)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;divide&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; - divide sign (/)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; - &amp;quot;greater than&amp;quot; sign ( &amp;gt; )&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; - &amp;quot;less than&amp;quot; sign (&amp;lt;) &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;laquo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; - quotation mark (‘)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lsquo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; - left single quotation sign (‘)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;rsquo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; - right single quotation sign (’)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Gapfill with extended HTML characters.png|Gapfill using some HTML codes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Set defaults for new questions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some default values can be configured for new instances of the question. With an admin login account go &#039;&#039; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins  &amp;gt; Question types  &#039;&#039; and select &#039;&#039; Gapfill  &amp;gt; Settings &#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This was very easy with the Clean theme:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:gapfill_admin.png|Gapfill Admin with Clean theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may be a little cumbersome with the Boost theme:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Boost gapfill admin.png|Gapfill Admin with Boost theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select settings and you will see the following form&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:gapfill_settings.png|Gapfill Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Prevent typing into gaps==&lt;br /&gt;
By default students can type into the gaps when dragdrop mode is enabled.  This can be prevented by adding some css  by a user with admin acces via the&lt;br /&gt;
additional HTML form. This can be found at http://yourmoodle.com/admin/settings.php?section=additionalhtml&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;style&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
.que.gapfill input.droptarget {&lt;br /&gt;
    text-align: center;&lt;br /&gt;
    cursor: pointer;&lt;br /&gt;
    pointer-events: none;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/style&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is the pointer-events:none that does the work. This is only a style change and a determined/knowledgeable student could always work around it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Use in modules other than quiz==&lt;br /&gt;
This question type has been used in other modules that use the quiz engine including the excellent [[StudentQuiz_module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Question Types ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a &#039;companion&#039; question type called [[Wordselect question type|Wordselect]] that may be of interest to users of this question type. Word select questions are created in a similar way, i.e. putting sqare braces around certain words. The difference is that all words are shown and the student has to click on the words they consider to be correct. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Gapfill question was designed to be simpler to use than the [[Embedded Answers (Cloze) question type|the core Cloze question type]].  However, the Gapfill type has fewer features than [[Embedded Answers (Cloze) question type|the Cloze type]]. There are [[Cloze editor module|cloze editors available for both TinyMCE and Atto]] that greatly ease the making of Cloze question types, without having to learn the complex cloze syntax.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two other core question types  that cover a slightly similar area to Gapfill&lt;br /&gt;
* the [[Drag and drop into text question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* and the [[Select missing words question type|Select missing words  (gapselect) question type]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Language teaching]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Tipo de pregunta llenarhueco]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Using_badges&amp;diff=140662</id>
		<title>Using badges</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Using_badges&amp;diff=140662"/>
		<updated>2021-10-31T16:12:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* Badge details */ badge issuer&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Badges}}This page is about how to add badges to a course or the site and how users can access their badges. For managing badges which have already been added, see [[Managing badges]].&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding a course badge==&lt;br /&gt;
If course badges have been enabled in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Badges &amp;gt; Badges&#039;&#039; settings then a teacher can add badges from &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Badges &amp;gt; Add a new badge&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
===Badge details===&lt;br /&gt;
Add a name and description and upload your badge here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the badge issuer is set globally by the site admin, you could include the course teacher&#039;s name here if you wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A badge version and language may be added, along with information about the author of the image used for the badge.&lt;br /&gt;
===Badge expiry===&lt;br /&gt;
Set a date here if the badge will cease to be valid after a certain date. Leave it to never if you want the badge to be permanently displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
*When the settings are saved, you are then taken to the Manage badges screen where you can decide the criteria for awarding the badge along with other optional information.&lt;br /&gt;
*This information can now include Endorsements, Related badges and (external) Competencies. See [[Managing badges]] for more details.&lt;br /&gt;
===Criteria===&lt;br /&gt;
*For course badges, the criteria are: Manual issue by role; course completion, activity completion, previously awarded badges, and competencies.&lt;br /&gt;
*When selecting Manual completion by role, you can choose the role you wish to award the badge, so for example a teacher could allow a non-editing teacher to award badges in the course.&lt;br /&gt;
*For badges to be awarded for course or activity completion, [[Completion tracking]] must be enabled in the site and the course.&lt;br /&gt;
* For awarded badges, a site badge can only have another site badge as criterion, whereas a course badge can have either another course badge or a site badge as criterion.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CourseBadgeCriteria.png|thumb|400px|center|Choosing criteria for the badge]]&lt;br /&gt;
It&#039;s possible to add a description of the criterion/criteria to provide more information or relevant links.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:criteriondescription.png|thumb|center|400px|Criterion description field]]&lt;br /&gt;
Once criteria have been set, you are returned to the Manage badges screen where you must &amp;quot;enable access&amp;quot; for the badge to be available:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:enableaccesscoursebadge.png|thumb|400px|center|Click to enable access to the badge]]&lt;br /&gt;
===Awarding the badge===&lt;br /&gt;
Badges may be awarded manually from the Badges link in the navigation drawer with the Boost theme or from &#039;&#039;Course administration &amp;gt; Badges &amp;gt; Manage badges &amp;gt; Recipients&#039;&#039; with other themes such as Classic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on the Overview, Edit details, Message and Recipients tab, see [[Managing badges]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tip: If your site has a large number of users, it&#039;s easier to search for email addresses than names.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;New in 3.8:&#039;&#039;&#039; If your course uses groups, it is possible to select a group and award the badge to members of just that group.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GroupBadgesAward.png|center|Awarding badges]]&lt;br /&gt;
===Revoking a badge===&lt;br /&gt;
If a badge is awarded my mistake, it may be revoked from the &#039;Badge recipients&#039; page. Click the badge in question, click the Award button, select the person whose badge you wish to revoke and click &#039;Revoke&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only badges which were awarded manually may be revoked.&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding a site badge==&lt;br /&gt;
*An administrator can add a site badge from &#039;&#039;Site administration / Badges / Add a new badge&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*While the settings are basically the same as for a teacher in a course, the criteria are slightly different because of the global nature of the badge. These are: manual issue by role; completing a set of courses or profile completion, cohort membership and previously awarded badges. As part of the profile completion criteria, a badge may be awarded for uploading a profile picture.&lt;br /&gt;
*In order to be able to award a site badge based on completing one or more courses, [[Completion tracking|completion tracking]] needs to be enabled in the site and relevant courses. In each course, [[Activity completion|activity completion]] must be set for the chosen activities, which must be then checked in the [[Course completion settings|course completion settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:SiteBadgeCriteria.png|thumb|Badge criteria for site badges]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
==Earning badges==&lt;br /&gt;
*Once all criteria are set and badge creator is happy with badge details and settings, site users can start earning it. For users to be able to earn a badge, a badge creator/administrator needs to enable access to this badge on a badge overview page or &amp;quot;Manage badges&amp;quot; page (as shown on the picture).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Normally badges are awarded to users automatically based on their actions in the system. The completion criteria of an active badge are re-calculated every time an event such as completion of a course or activity, or updating user profile happens. If a user has completed all necessary requirements they are issued a badge and sent an email notification.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Only badges with enabled access are available to users and can be earned!&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Badge enable access.png|thumb|Enabling badge access]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Earning a badge.png|thumb|Earning a badge]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://school.moodledemo.net/badges/index.php?type=1  School demo example: Managing site badges] (Log in with username: &#039;&#039;manager&#039;&#039;, password: &#039;&#039;moodle&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://school.moodledemo.net/badges/index.php?type=2&amp;amp;id=62  School demo example: Managing course badges] (Log in with username: &#039;&#039;teacher&#039;&#039;, password: &#039;&#039;moodle&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://school.moodledemo.net/badges/mybadges.php School demo example: Viewing your own badges] (Log in with username: &#039;&#039;student&#039;&#039;, password: &#039;&#039;moodle&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://remediatingassessment.blogspot.co.nz/2013/07/research-design-principles-for-studying.html Research Design Principles for Studying Learning with Digital Badges] Re-mediating assessment blog post&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://info.badgr.com/resources/sharing-digital-badges-on-social-media.htm Badgr - A Guide to Sharing Digital Badges on Social Media]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Usando insignias]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Auszeichnungen nutzen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Using_Database&amp;diff=140596</id>
		<title>Using Database</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Using_Database&amp;diff=140596"/>
		<updated>2021-09-07T17:10:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* See also */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Database}}&lt;br /&gt;
This page explores ways the [[Database activity]] may be used in your Moodle course.&lt;br /&gt;
==Views==&lt;br /&gt;
===View list===&lt;br /&gt;
The list view shows multiple entries, possibly in a more abbreviated form to ensure all the information fits. You may use the controls at the bottom of the screen to search and sort the contents.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;View single&#039;&#039;: one item at a time&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;View list&#039;&#039; : several items at a time (number is user defined)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Add entry&#039;&#039; : add an item to the database&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Search&#039;&#039; : search the entries&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:26databaseview.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Deleting multiple entries===&lt;br /&gt;
In List view, a checkbox will appear next to each entry. Select the entries you wish to delete and click the &#039;Delete selected&#039; button. Alternatively, click the &#039;Select all&#039; and the &#039;Delete all&#039; buttons to delete all entries. A warning message will appear asking you to verify what you wish to delete.&lt;br /&gt;
==Automatically linking database entries==&lt;br /&gt;
If the [[Database auto-linking filter]] is enabled, any entries in a database will be automatically linked to where the concept words and/or phrases appear within the same course. This includes forum postings, internal resources, week summaries etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you do not want particular text to be linked (in a forum posting, say) then you should add &amp;lt;nolink&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;/nolink&amp;gt; tags around the text. Alternatively the filter can be disabled for a particular activity.&lt;br /&gt;
==Approving and undoing approval of entries==&lt;br /&gt;
If, during database set up, &#039;Approval required&#039; was set to &#039;Yes&#039; then a teacher can approve an entry by clicking on the tick/checkmark icon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once an entry has been approved, it is possible to undo the approval by clicking the circle with a line through it icon. &lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:26databaseapprove.png|thumb|Entry approved]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:26databaseunapprove.png|thumb|Approval undone]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Entries waiting for approval may be highlighted for the teacher and the user who added the entry.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:database highlighting.png|thumb|Highlighted entry waiting for approval]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing many entries==&lt;br /&gt;
You can import entries via a CSV file if you click the &amp;quot;Import entries&amp;quot; link under &#039;Database activity administration&#039; in the Administration block of your course. CSV means Comma-Separated-Values and is a common format for text interchange.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Databaseupload.png|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The easiest way to determine the format of the text file is to manually add an entry to the database and then export it. The resulting export text file may then be edited and used for importing entries. Here&#039;s a sample of what a very simple file will look like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Upload_csv_sample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expected file format is a plain text file with a list of field names as the first record. The data then follows, one record per line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The field delimiter defaults to a comma character and the field enclosure is not set by default (field enclosures are characters that surround each field in each record).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Records should be delimited by new lines (usually generated by pressing RETURN or ENTER in your text editor). Tabs can be specified using \t and newlines by \n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sample file:&lt;br /&gt;
  name,height,weight&lt;br /&gt;
  Kai,180cm,80kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Kim,170cm,60kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Koo,190cm,20kg&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Certain field types may not be supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not put spaces after your commas or upload will fail!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After upload page import.php comes back blank if it failed.&lt;br /&gt;
If successful you&#039;ll read a message like, &amp;quot;1 entries saved&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting entries==&lt;br /&gt;
You can export entries either in CSV (comma separated values) or ODS (OpenOffice Calc) formats by clicking the tab at the top or by clicking the &amp;quot;Export entries&amp;quot; link under &#039;Database activity administration&#039; in the Administration block in your course. (Both CSV and ODS formats can be opened with MS Excel.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Databasexport.png|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using the CSV format, the user can select either the comma, semicolon, or tab to separate the fields. The selection of the proper character is important. If users select to use a comma to separate the fields and some of the fields contain data with commas then the number of columns is going to be misaligned and likely cause confusion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can select which fields from the database they wish to have exported. By default, all fields are checked to be included. Choose the fields that you wish to have included in the export.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the export type and the fields to be exported have been selected, clicking on the Export entries pushbutton will generate the file. The user will usually have the option of either opening or saving the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on converting the date export (and import) format, see the discussion [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=220505 Standard Database Module - Dates].&lt;br /&gt;
==Enabling an RSS feed of recently added entries==&lt;br /&gt;
To enable an RSS feed from a database activity, an administrator must first enable RSS feeds for database activities across the whole site as described in [[RSS feeds settings]]. A section called &#039;RSS&#039; will then appear on the edit settings page of the database activity. &lt;br /&gt;
# Edit the database activity settings and set the number of entries in the RSS feed e.g. 5.&lt;br /&gt;
# Check that the RSS template includes the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
# Log out and then access the database activity as a guest.&lt;br /&gt;
# Copy the &#039;RSS feed for this activity&#039; link in the administration block.&lt;br /&gt;
The RSS feed may then be displayed in an [[Remote RSS feeds block]] or elsewhere.&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting to an external portfolio==&lt;br /&gt;
If an external [[Portfolios|portfolio]] such as [[Mahara_portfolio|Mahara]] has been enabled by the administrator then users have the option to export individual entries to that portfolio if the ##export## tag is added to list and/or single templates. They will see at the bottom of a database entry an &amp;quot;export&amp;quot; icon to click on and select the portfolio to export to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Exportdatabasentry.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
== Creative uses ==&lt;br /&gt;
You could use the database module to:&lt;br /&gt;
* allow collaboration on building a collection of web links/books/journal references related to a particular subject&lt;br /&gt;
* display student created photos/posters/websites/poems for peer comment and review&lt;br /&gt;
* gather comments and votes on a shortlist of potential logos/mascot names/project ideas&lt;br /&gt;
* provide a [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=52699 student file storage area]&lt;br /&gt;
* maintain a log of what was done in a face-to-face class each day, so that absent students can get caught up themselves. [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=115047 Example]&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://school.moodledemo.org/course/view.php?id=57&amp;amp;section=3 Examples of databases in the School demo site] (available for download)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Glossary module]], which performs a similar though more specialised, text-based role&lt;br /&gt;
* Moodle in English [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=3505 Database activity module forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?d=54 Moodle.org jobs database] - example of a database activity on Moodle.org.&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datenbank nutzen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Usando BasedeDatos]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Using_Database&amp;diff=140595</id>
		<title>Using Database</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Using_Database&amp;diff=140595"/>
		<updated>2021-09-07T17:10:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* Example databases */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Database}}&lt;br /&gt;
This page explores ways the [[Database activity]] may be used in your Moodle course.&lt;br /&gt;
==Views==&lt;br /&gt;
===View list===&lt;br /&gt;
The list view shows multiple entries, possibly in a more abbreviated form to ensure all the information fits. You may use the controls at the bottom of the screen to search and sort the contents.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;View single&#039;&#039;: one item at a time&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;View list&#039;&#039; : several items at a time (number is user defined)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Add entry&#039;&#039; : add an item to the database&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Search&#039;&#039; : search the entries&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:26databaseview.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Deleting multiple entries===&lt;br /&gt;
In List view, a checkbox will appear next to each entry. Select the entries you wish to delete and click the &#039;Delete selected&#039; button. Alternatively, click the &#039;Select all&#039; and the &#039;Delete all&#039; buttons to delete all entries. A warning message will appear asking you to verify what you wish to delete.&lt;br /&gt;
==Automatically linking database entries==&lt;br /&gt;
If the [[Database auto-linking filter]] is enabled, any entries in a database will be automatically linked to where the concept words and/or phrases appear within the same course. This includes forum postings, internal resources, week summaries etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you do not want particular text to be linked (in a forum posting, say) then you should add &amp;lt;nolink&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;/nolink&amp;gt; tags around the text. Alternatively the filter can be disabled for a particular activity.&lt;br /&gt;
==Approving and undoing approval of entries==&lt;br /&gt;
If, during database set up, &#039;Approval required&#039; was set to &#039;Yes&#039; then a teacher can approve an entry by clicking on the tick/checkmark icon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once an entry has been approved, it is possible to undo the approval by clicking the circle with a line through it icon. &lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:26databaseapprove.png|thumb|Entry approved]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:26databaseunapprove.png|thumb|Approval undone]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Entries waiting for approval may be highlighted for the teacher and the user who added the entry.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:database highlighting.png|thumb|Highlighted entry waiting for approval]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing many entries==&lt;br /&gt;
You can import entries via a CSV file if you click the &amp;quot;Import entries&amp;quot; link under &#039;Database activity administration&#039; in the Administration block of your course. CSV means Comma-Separated-Values and is a common format for text interchange.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Databaseupload.png|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The easiest way to determine the format of the text file is to manually add an entry to the database and then export it. The resulting export text file may then be edited and used for importing entries. Here&#039;s a sample of what a very simple file will look like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Upload_csv_sample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expected file format is a plain text file with a list of field names as the first record. The data then follows, one record per line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The field delimiter defaults to a comma character and the field enclosure is not set by default (field enclosures are characters that surround each field in each record).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Records should be delimited by new lines (usually generated by pressing RETURN or ENTER in your text editor). Tabs can be specified using \t and newlines by \n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sample file:&lt;br /&gt;
  name,height,weight&lt;br /&gt;
  Kai,180cm,80kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Kim,170cm,60kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Koo,190cm,20kg&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Certain field types may not be supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not put spaces after your commas or upload will fail!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After upload page import.php comes back blank if it failed.&lt;br /&gt;
If successful you&#039;ll read a message like, &amp;quot;1 entries saved&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting entries==&lt;br /&gt;
You can export entries either in CSV (comma separated values) or ODS (OpenOffice Calc) formats by clicking the tab at the top or by clicking the &amp;quot;Export entries&amp;quot; link under &#039;Database activity administration&#039; in the Administration block in your course. (Both CSV and ODS formats can be opened with MS Excel.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Databasexport.png|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using the CSV format, the user can select either the comma, semicolon, or tab to separate the fields. The selection of the proper character is important. If users select to use a comma to separate the fields and some of the fields contain data with commas then the number of columns is going to be misaligned and likely cause confusion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can select which fields from the database they wish to have exported. By default, all fields are checked to be included. Choose the fields that you wish to have included in the export.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the export type and the fields to be exported have been selected, clicking on the Export entries pushbutton will generate the file. The user will usually have the option of either opening or saving the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on converting the date export (and import) format, see the discussion [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=220505 Standard Database Module - Dates].&lt;br /&gt;
==Enabling an RSS feed of recently added entries==&lt;br /&gt;
To enable an RSS feed from a database activity, an administrator must first enable RSS feeds for database activities across the whole site as described in [[RSS feeds settings]]. A section called &#039;RSS&#039; will then appear on the edit settings page of the database activity. &lt;br /&gt;
# Edit the database activity settings and set the number of entries in the RSS feed e.g. 5.&lt;br /&gt;
# Check that the RSS template includes the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
# Log out and then access the database activity as a guest.&lt;br /&gt;
# Copy the &#039;RSS feed for this activity&#039; link in the administration block.&lt;br /&gt;
The RSS feed may then be displayed in an [[Remote RSS feeds block]] or elsewhere.&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting to an external portfolio==&lt;br /&gt;
If an external [[Portfolios|portfolio]] such as [[Mahara_portfolio|Mahara]] has been enabled by the administrator then users have the option to export individual entries to that portfolio if the ##export## tag is added to list and/or single templates. They will see at the bottom of a database entry an &amp;quot;export&amp;quot; icon to click on and select the portfolio to export to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Exportdatabasentry.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
== Creative uses ==&lt;br /&gt;
You could use the database module to:&lt;br /&gt;
* allow collaboration on building a collection of web links/books/journal references related to a particular subject&lt;br /&gt;
* display student created photos/posters/websites/poems for peer comment and review&lt;br /&gt;
* gather comments and votes on a shortlist of potential logos/mascot names/project ideas&lt;br /&gt;
* provide a [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=52699 student file storage area]&lt;br /&gt;
* maintain a log of what was done in a face-to-face class each day, so that absent students can get caught up themselves. [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=115047 Example]&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://school.moodledemo.net/course/view.php?id=57&amp;amp;section=3 Examples of databases in the School demo site] (available for download)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Glossary module]], which performs a similar though more specialised, text-based role&lt;br /&gt;
* Moodle in English [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=3505 Database activity module forum]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datenbank nutzen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Usando BasedeDatos]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Language_FAQ&amp;diff=140420</id>
		<title>Language FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Language_FAQ&amp;diff=140420"/>
		<updated>2021-05-18T10:35:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* Can I add another language keys to my Windows PC? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Language}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Which is the official language for Moodle? ===&lt;br /&gt;
The [http://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=2617 &amp;quot;official&amp;quot;] language for Moodle is actually the Australian English (&#039;&#039;hey mate!&#039;&#039;) , which is 100% the same as UK English. The default language on a new installation of Moodle, unless you change it, will be this version of English, denoted by the language code &amp;quot;en&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== What do codes like &amp;quot;en&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;en_us&amp;quot;  or &amp;quot;es&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;es_mx&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;es_ve&amp;quot; mean?? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are the language codes for each language. There is a standard for these, see [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_ISO_639-1_codes ISO language code list].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second part, &amp;quot;_us&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;_mx&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;_ve&amp;quot; for example, represent localisations of the main language for a particular country or dialect. Typically these will include variant spellings and other preferred local terminology and phrasing. So &amp;quot;es_mx&amp;quot; has spellings and idioms (and a very important [[Decimal separator]]) used in Mexican Spanish which are distinct from international Spanish. The es_ve has small differences from the international spanish that are of significance to Moodle users in Venezuela.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;en_us&amp;quot; is the English - United States language pack; &amp;quot;en&amp;quot; is Australian English, which is practically the same as British English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== I found a mistake or typo in a language pack. Or my language is only partial, much of it is still English. What do I do? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Language packs have maintainers and Moodle has its own language translation toolkit, known as AMOS. Other than some core languages maintained by Moodle HQ, most languages are maintained by volunteer maintainers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See the [https://docs.moodle.org/dev/Translation_FAQ Translation FAQ page] for how to report issues and [https://lang.moodle.org/mod/page/view.php?id=9 the AMOS for newcomers page] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Default Language  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Where can I set the default language for the site? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Site Administration &amp;gt; Language &amp;gt; [[Language settings]]&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note you can only choose to set as default a Language pack that is already installed. If the language you want is not on the list, you will need to install the language pack first. See [[Language packs]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== When I change to a new default language, users still have the old language. ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Correct. When you change to a new site default language, this does not update the language setting in the profile for already existing users. It only sets a new default for new user accounts you create from now on. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do updates for already existing users, you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Tell users how to change it themselves in their user profiles by setting their Preferences &amp;gt; Preferred language&lt;br /&gt;
* Use the [[Upload users]] tool to do a mass update from a csv file changing the lang field&lt;br /&gt;
* If you have access to the database, you can change this with a simple query. See [[ad-hoc_contributed_reports#List_of_users_with_language|here for an example]] of how to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== When I log in, the language switches to English. Why? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* For logged-in users, the language is set to the one they have set as their preferred language (Preferences &amp;gt; User account &amp;gt; Preferred language).&lt;br /&gt;
* For logged-out visitors (before they log in) the situation depends on whether the language auto-detection is enabled. They can either get the language their browser claims to be the requested one, or the site default language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== I&#039;ve set a default site language, but the Moodle calendar is in English. Why? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If your Moodle calendar is not translated, then the string &#039;locale&#039; (for *nix and Mac servers) or the string &#039;localewin&#039; (for Windows servers) in the &#039;langconfig.php&#039; file is wrong (or your server is not configured to support the language). &lt;br /&gt;
* There are quite a few languages that are not supported by Windows servers and the localewin server can not be set. In that case, you have to run your Moodle on a *nix server to make the translation of your Moodle calendar work. &lt;br /&gt;
* Mac OSs have very poor locale support. &lt;br /&gt;
* See [[:dev:Translation_langconfig]] for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Actually, the one and only place where Moodle requires some locales to be installed on the machine is when handling date translation (according to [https://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-31622 this information]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How can I disable (hide) the language dropdown menu on the site front page? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Language &amp;gt; Language settings&#039;&#039; and un-tick the &#039;Display language menu&#039; checkbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because it is a customisation, Moodle will not erase the xx_local language files in Moodledata with an upgrade.   Moodle will upgrade any language folders it finds in the moodle/lang folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Warning message: Your server does not seem to fully support the following languages:==&lt;br /&gt;
When you install or update a language pack, your server might display the following warning:&lt;br /&gt;
 Your server does not seem to fully support the following languages:&lt;br /&gt;
followed by a list of non-supported languages and the text:&lt;br /&gt;
 Instead, the global locale (en_AU.UTF-8) will be used to format certain strings such as dates and numbers.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Your_server_does_not_seem_to_fully_support.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* This is caused by either:&lt;br /&gt;
** a problem with the locale (Linux and Mac) or localewin (windows) setting in langconfig.php for your language pack (you can contact your language pack maintainer listed in the [https://lang.moodle.org/local/amos/credits.php translation credits]) &lt;br /&gt;
** or the configuration of your server.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you have a Linux server (or a [[MoodleBox]]), see the documentation about [https://docs.moodle.org/dev/Table_of_locales installing additional locales].&lt;br /&gt;
* If you have a Windows or a Mac Moodle server that lacks the proper locales, we can not help you :(&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See the [https://docs.moodle.org/dev/Translation_langconfig developer&#039;s documentation]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Language Customisation and Multi-language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How can I change a word or phrase used in Moodle? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site Administration &amp;gt; Language &amp;gt; Language customisation&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Language customisation]] for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How can I find where a language string is located? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See the section &#039;Finding the component and string identifier&#039; in [[Language customisation]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Why are my changes not saved in my MoodleCloud site?===&lt;br /&gt;
Unfortunately customising language strings is not supported in MoodleCloud. (The same string cache is used for  for all sites and is read-only.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Why are my changes not saved if I edit a language pack with the Moodle language pack editor? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This could be caused by the caching on the server. Language strings are cached into server memory for performance reasons and when you save changes, they may not be immediately picked up. First, refresh your own browser cache to refresh the pages from the site. Then if the strings are still not there, an administrator can purge the cache of the server. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I provide course content in more than one language?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Labels, web pages, activity descriptions etc. may be provided in more than one language using the [[Multi language content|Multi language content filter]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another option is to create activities in different languages and restrict access to them using the [https://moodle.org/plugins/availability_language Restriction by language plugin].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See the discussion [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=383302 Multiple Languages] for further options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I provide course headings in more than one language?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the multi language content filter to apply to content AND headings in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Filters &amp;gt; Manage filters&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Are there any short cuts for editing a language?===&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, but be careful.  You can make use of the customise language process.  Basically copy the php files that contain the strings you want to change to the moodledata/lang/local folder.   For example, copy the /lang/en/moodle.php file to someplace.  Edit the file with a search and replace with whole word and case sensitive turned on, change Teacher to Instructor and Teachers to Instructors, do the same for teacher and teachers.  Now copy that saved copy of the moodle.php file to the  moodledata/lang/en_local folder.   Be careful not to change the String name. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Is it possible to customise language strings per theme?===&lt;br /&gt;
Not by default, as when strings are customised, they are customised for the whole site. However, it is possible to make a new language  pack based on your main language and apply that pack to the course which has the theme. See this forum post for more information: https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=220671&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Is it possible to use a translation extension in the browser to display a Moodle site in another language===&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, according to [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=414236#p1669886 this forum post]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* For Firefox:&lt;br /&gt;
** Install the [https://www.mozilla.org/en-US/exp/firefox/new/ Firefox brower] if not already installed on your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
** Open Firefox.&lt;br /&gt;
** Go to Firefox [https://addons.mozilla.org/en-US/firefox/ Browser Add-ons].&lt;br /&gt;
** Search the [https://addons.mozilla.org/en-US/firefox/addon/traduzir-paginas-web/ Translate Web Pages extension], by Filipe Ps, and add it to Firefox.&lt;br /&gt;
** Follow the instructions for this extension.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* For Chrome:&lt;br /&gt;
** Install [https://www.google.com/intl/en/chrome/ Google Chrome] if not already installed on your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
** Open Chrome.&lt;br /&gt;
** From the Google Web Store, install the [https://chrome.google.com/webstore/detail/google-translate/aapbdbdomjkkjkaonfhkkikfgjllcleb?utm_source=chrome-ntp-icon Google Translate extension].&lt;br /&gt;
** Turn translation on by following [https://www.howtogeek.com/407924/how-to-turn-translation-on-or-off-in-chrome/ these steps] (from How-To Geek).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Is it possible to change the logo according to language selected, similar to multi-language content?===&lt;br /&gt;
Yes. See [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=345919 this forum thread]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Other Language Questions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Will installing several language packs decrease my server performance?===&lt;br /&gt;
Installing many (20+) language packs have [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=241098 almost 0 impact] on Moodle performance. A copy of the language packs installed are stored in your site&#039;s local /mooodledata directory. Also, actively used language strings are cached in memory by your server as well to help performance, so as long as your server has sufficient RAM there will be no impact from having many language packs installed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== What is this Pirate version of English doing on my site? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has become something of a custom in the Moodle community over the years to observe [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/International_Talk_Like_a_Pirate_Day &#039;Talk Like a Pirate Day&#039;] (September 19th) by temporarily changing the language of a site to allow the English - Pirate (en_ar) language pack. See the discussion [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=132888 here] for more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lang pack download failed with &#039;HTTP response code: HTTP/1.1 404 Not Found&#039; after new release ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After we branch for a new release, Moodle will try and download the new version of lang packs, however for a while development is on-sync and no new language string differences will be introduced between the two branches. During this period, AMOS is not branched and so Moodle will fail to download new language packs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is expected and it will be resolved once AMOS is opened up for new changes in the new version. See MDL-34028 for example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Why do the characters for my language (not English) show up as hollow squares ?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Language_pack_name_not_displayed.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This problem may be caused by a missing/wrong character set or using a font that does not support the character map needed (see [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=327521 this forum thead]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Language pack name is displayed.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Are there statistics for language packs downloads?===&lt;br /&gt;
Yes. There are download stats for the past 60 days at [https://download.moodle.org/local/downloadmoodleorg/stats.php Moodle downloads stats]. See under Languages a long list of the different packs that have been downloaded:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Language packs downloads stats.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Is it possible to streamline the translation of a Moodle course?===&lt;br /&gt;
Kind of... See [https://docs.moodle.org/dev/Translation#Translating_a_Moodle_course Translating a Moodle course] in the developer&#039;s documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Can I disable google page translation on my Moodle site?===&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, according to [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=419424#p1690452 this post]:&lt;br /&gt;
 The general answer is to add translate=&amp;quot;no&amp;quot; to the html tag of your page, but that requires a code change.&lt;br /&gt;
 So the Moodle html-page starts with (source https://stackoverflow.com/questions/12238396/how-to-disable-google-translate-from-html-in-chrome)&lt;br /&gt;
 There are more options in the source discussion that are finer to control.&lt;br /&gt;
 In moodle/admin/settings.php?section=additionalhtml, you can add in the section&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;meta name=&amp;quot;google&amp;quot; content=&amp;quot;notranslate&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 and that should stop Google chrome to translate...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Can I add another language key to my Windows PC?===&lt;br /&gt;
Yes. If you have an English keyboard in your PC, but you want to write Spanish words like &amp;quot;Hasta mañana&amp;quot; and you need to type the &#039;ñ&#039; letter, see [https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/manage-the-input-and-display-language-settings-in-windows-10-12a10cb4-8626-9b77-0ccb-5013e0c7c7a2 this link].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=131927#p604462 Edited Strings Not Visible]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=316623#unread Months names in Arabic language pack]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=395788#p1595968 Multilingual moodle]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* MDL-57867 - Email notification language strings lose line breaks when customised bug&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Any further questions?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please post in the [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?f=26 Languages forum] on moodle.org.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:FAQ de langue]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Sprache FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Idioma FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Dashboard&amp;diff=140293</id>
		<title>Dashboard</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Dashboard&amp;diff=140293"/>
		<updated>2021-04-28T07:35:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* About the Dashboard */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Site appearance}}&lt;br /&gt;
==About the Dashboard==&lt;br /&gt;
The Dashboard is a customisable page for providing users with details of their progress and upcoming deadlines. In the centre is the [[Course overview block]] which allows students and teachers to easily track required activities and filter courses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{MediaPlayer | url = https://youtu.be/zHQNLF9ZgL8 | desc = Overview of the Dashboard}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If course images have been added in the course settings, they will display in the dashboard. Where no images have been added, coloured patterns appear. (&#039;&#039;&#039;New in 3.8:&#039;&#039;&#039; The administrator can define the colours from Site administration / Appearance /Course pattern colours.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quick access to Dashboard is also available from the user menu top right of the screen once logged in:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:usermenufontawesome.png|thumb|center|User menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Navigation drawer or block includes a Dashboard link directly above or below the Site home link. Once a regular user is logged in, the My courses link will also take them to their Dashboard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can normally customise their Dashboard, adding or removing blocks and changing block positions. They can revert their Dashboard back to the original blocks as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Customise this page&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Reset page to default&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Resetdefault.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(Note that an administrator can reset the Dashboard for all users from &#039;Default Dashboard page&#039; in the Site administration).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Default home page==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For new installations, Dashboard is the default home page for logged in users. An administrator can change the default home page  in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Navigation&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If &#039;User preference&#039; is selected as default home page, each user needs to set the desired page – Site home ore Dashboard – under User menu &amp;gt; Preferences &amp;gt; User account &amp;gt; Home page. Once selected, Moodle will remember which page to present them each time they log on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:defaulthomepagelink.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Setting the default Dashboard==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator or manager (or other user with the capability [[Capabilities/moodle/my:configsyspages|moodle/my:configsyspages]]) can set the default blocks  for all users from  &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Default Dashboard page&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking the button &#039;Reset Dashboard for all users&#039; will then apply these settings to the Dashboard for everyone on the site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default blocks are:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Navigation block|Navigation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Administration block|Administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Course overview block|Course overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Private files block|Private files]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Latest badges block|Latest badges]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Calendar block|Calendar]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Upcoming events block|Upcoming events]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Online users block|Online users]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preventing users from customizing their Dashboard==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, users can customize their Dashboard and add blocks. An admin can prevent this as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit the authenticated user role and untick the [[Capabilities/moodle/my:manageblocks|Manage Dashboard blocks capability]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Dashboard capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/moodle/my:manageblocks|Manage Dashboard blocks]] (see above)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/moodle/my:configsyspages|Configure system templates for Dashboard]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, all blocks which may be added to a Dashboard have a &#039;&#039;myaddinstance&#039;&#039; capability (e.g. [[Capabilities/block/comments:myaddinstance|block/comments:myaddinstance]]) for controlling whether a user with a particular role can add the block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preventing users from adding a block to their Dashboard==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, users can add many blocks to their Dashboard. An admin can prevent them from adding a particular block, such as the [[Online users block]], as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit the authenticated user role and untick the [[Capabilities/block/online users:myaddinstance|Add a new online users block to the Dashboard capability]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Blocks not available on the Dashboard==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following blocks may not be added to a user&#039;s Dashboard (because it wouldn&#039;t make sense):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Course completion status block]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Course/site summary block]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Self completion block]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=340126 Show Categories of courses on Dashboard after sign in] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=418596#p1693029 Hide a block from student roles?] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Nire_Moodle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Tableau de bord]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Dashboard]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Tablero]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=No_authentication&amp;diff=139905</id>
		<title>No authentication</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=No_authentication&amp;diff=139905"/>
		<updated>2021-03-25T10:47:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: updating link from Site policies to Site security settings&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Authentication}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:no auth.png|thumb|left|Login page when using no authentication]]An administrator can enable &#039;No authentication&#039; in &#039;Manage authentication&#039; in the Site administration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the &amp;quot;No Authentication&amp;quot; method enabled, a user can create an account without any kind of authentication from other systems, and with no email-based confirmation that the email address that they have provided is valid, or even exists!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{warning|message=This creates a very insecure Moodle site, and is not recommended.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is an option that would normally be used only for testing purposes or if your Moodle site is not available on the Internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The configuration page for this option only offers the ability to lock fields, enable or disable guest access, and provide an alternative login page, in the same way as other authentication plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: You need to un-tick &#039;Email change confirmation&#039; in &#039;Site security settings&#039; to avoid new users being asked to confirm their email address after updating their profile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to change the text that appears under &amp;quot;Is this your first time here?&amp;quot;, use the Language Customization tool to edit the language string &#039;loginstepsnone&#039; found in moodle.php.  Note, this string is different from &#039;loginsteps&#039;, which is the string used for Email-based Self-registration. Text added in the Instructions box found in Site administration ... Plugins ... Authentication ... Manage authentication is not displayed when No Authentication is used; you must edit the language string to make changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Ohne Authentifizierung]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Sin Autenticación]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Autentifikatu_gabe]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Pas d&#039;authentification]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:認証なし]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Messaging&amp;diff=139875</id>
		<title>Messaging</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Messaging&amp;diff=139875"/>
		<updated>2021-03-15T14:38:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: note about teachers being in the group with students for group messaging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{More features}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==About messaging==&lt;br /&gt;
Unless disabled by the administrator (in  Site administration &amp;gt; Messaging &amp;gt; Messaging settings), teachers, students and other users may send and receive private messages via Moodle. This is in addition to receiving [[Notifications|notifications]] about assignments, forum discussions etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{MediaPlayer | url = https://youtu.be/-hycmrpw0xA | desc = 3.7 New messaging features}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*A number at the top of the screen reflects the number of people who have sent new messages.&lt;br /&gt;
*Clicking the icon displays the messaging drawer, divided into starred messages, group messages and personal messages.&lt;br /&gt;
*Contacts and contact requests may be accessed from the Contacts link.&lt;br /&gt;
*A star may be added by clicking the three dots when viewing a message&lt;br /&gt;
*From the three dots, messages may be muted, so that email notifications of new messages are no longer sent:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SmallMuteMessages.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Clicking the cog icon displays privacy settings, notification preferences and the option to press enter to send messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:36messagingprivacysettings.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Personal messaging space==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each user now has their own starred area where they can add draft messages, links and notes for later use:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SmallPersonalSpace.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Deleting messages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Messages may be deleted by clicking them, ensuring they are selected (with a visible checkmark) and then clicking the bin/trash can icon at the bottom of the messaging drawer. Note that messages are only deleted for that particular user, not others involved in the conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Enabling teachers to delete the messages of others===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable a teacher to delete messages of others in a group conversion:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a [[Creating custom roles|custom role]] with the capability [[Capabilities/moodle/site:deleteanymessage| moodle/site:deleteanymessage]] allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Assign the user this role as a system role (via Site admin / Users / Permissions / Assign system roles).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that it is fine for a user to have the role of teacher in a course and also a system role enabling them to delete any message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DeleteAnyMessage.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Restricting who can message you==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default when clicking the cog icon, a user has the option to restrict messages to their contacts only or to their contacts and others in their courses. However the administrator can enable site wide messaging, thus giving visibility to all users, from a setting in Site administration &amp;gt; Messaging &amp;gt; Messaging settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Group messaging==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A teacher or user with the capability [[Capabilities/moodle/course:creategroupconversations | moodle/course:creategroupconversations]] can enable group messaging when setting up a course group. The group will then appear in the group messaging section of the messaging drawer. The teacher or other user should be a member of the group in order to see the group messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Sending a message to selected course participants==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A teacher can send a message to course participants as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the Participants page.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select participants from the list or use the &amp;quot;Select all&amp;quot; button at the bottom of the list.&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose &amp;quot;Add/send message&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;With selected users...&amp;quot; drop-down menu.&lt;br /&gt;
# Assuming you are satisfied with the message, click the &amp;quot;Send&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Administrators can also send a message to users in many courses via [[Bulk user actions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Notifications]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Messaging settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Messaging FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Messaging]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Mensajería]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Mezularitza]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Mitteilungen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Messagerie]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:メッセージング]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Groups&amp;diff=139874</id>
		<title>Groups</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Groups&amp;diff=139874"/>
		<updated>2021-03-15T14:37:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: note about teachers being in the group with students for group messaging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Grouping users}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Why use groups?==&lt;br /&gt;
*You are a teacher in a course where you have several classes and you want to filter your activities and gradebook so you only see one class at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
*You are a teacher sharing a course with other teachers and you want to filter your activities and gradebook so you don’t see the students from your colleagues’ classes.&lt;br /&gt;
*You want to allocate a particular activity, resource or topic section to just one class or set of users and you don’t want others to see it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{MediaPlayer | url = https://youtu.be/X9aQ2TiYXs0| desc = How to add groups to courses}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*This [https://youtu.be/pKAFWItexUY screencast about using groups] also highlights the benefits of using groups.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Group levels==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:groupmodecourse.png|thumb|Groups settings in course settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
A group or grouping can be used on two levels:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Course level - The group mode defined at the course level is the default mode for all activities defined within that course.  To use groups you need first to set a group mode in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Edit settings.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Activity level - Each activity that supports groups can also have its own group mode defined. If the course  setting &amp;quot;Force group mode&amp;quot; is set to &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot; then the option to define the group mode for individual activities is not available. If it is set to &amp;quot;No&amp;quot;, then the teacher may change the group mode:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Group modes===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three group modes &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*No groups - There are no sub groups, everyone is part of one big community&lt;br /&gt;
*Separate groups - Each group can only see their own group, others are invisible.&lt;br /&gt;
*Visible groups - Each group works in their own group, but can also see other groups. (The other groups&#039; work is read-only.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, enabling either separate or visible groups on an assignment drop-box enables staff to filter the student submissions to see only those from a particular tutor group. With visible groups, students can see which other groups are doing the same activities as they are; with separate groups, they do not know which other groups are doing the same activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using groups with discussion forums allow teachers to restrict interaction between students. Separate groups mean only students in the same group can see and participate in discussions within a particular forum. Visible groups allow students to see other group&#039;s discussions, but only participate in their own group&#039;s discussions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Where visible groups are used or the participant can access all groups, the user&#039;s own group is shown first, followed by other groups:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:mygroupsfirst.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a group==&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;Create group&#039;&#039; button:&lt;br /&gt;
## (using the Boost theme) select &#039;&#039;Participants&#039;&#039; from the navigation drawer, click the &#039;&#039;⚙&#039;&#039; (actions menu) on the right, then &#039;&#039;Groups&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
## (using the Classic theme) &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Groups&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Add a group name and optional description (displayed above the list of group members on the participants page), [[Enrolment key|enrolment key]] and picture (displayed on the participants page and next to forum posts)&lt;br /&gt;
#Tick the box Enable group messaging if you wish to enage in group conversations. You will then be able to send group messages from the messaging drawer. Make sure you are in the group as well as your students. See [[Messaging]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &#039;Save changes&#039; button&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the group to which you want to add participants, then click the &#039;Add/remove users button&lt;br /&gt;
# In the &amp;quot;Potential members&amp;quot; list, select the users you want to add to the group. Multiple users may be selected using the Crtl key.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Add button to add the users to the group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An optional group ID number (an advanced setting) may be added for matching the group against external systems. Group ID numbers are not displayed anywhere on the site. Within a course, all group ID numbers must be unique. Thus it&#039;s not possible to create a group with a duplicate group ID number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In Moodle 3.8, a default group icon is displayed in forum posts when there is no group picture set (MDL-67959). A workaround to the problem is to hide the picture in the group settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Auto-create groups==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:autocreategroups.png|thumb|Auto-create groups]]&lt;br /&gt;
Groups may be created automatically via the &#039;Auto-create groups&#039; button in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Groups&#039;&#039;. To see all the settings, click the &#039;&#039;Expand all&#039;&#039; link top right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General===&lt;br /&gt;
A &#039;&#039;&#039;naming scheme&#039;&#039;&#039; can be created automatically.  # is replaced by sequential numbers, and @ by letters.  For example:  &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;Group @&#039;&#039; will create group with a naming scheme Group A, Group B, Group C . . .&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;Group #&#039;&#039; will create group with a naming scheme Group 1, Group 2, Group 3 . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can specify if you would like to  create &lt;br /&gt;
*x number of Groups or &lt;br /&gt;
*each group contain x number of students&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Prevent last small group ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When selecting &#039;&#039;&#039;Members per group&#039;&#039;&#039;, depending on the number of users in the course, the last group can end up with significantly fewer members than expected. You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;Prevent last small group&#039;&#039;&#039; to avoid the situation. If the last group would be smaller than 70% of the expected size, it will not be created. Instead, Moodle will allocate additional members to existing groups rather then create a new group with few members.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example 1:&lt;br /&gt;
:You have a course with 80 students and you let auto-create groups with 30 members per group. There would be just 20 students in the third group which is 66% out of expected 30. Moodle will auto-create only two groups with 40 students in each.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example 2: &lt;br /&gt;
:You have a course with 81 students and you let auto-create groups with 30 members per group. Moodle will create three groups with 30, 30 and 21 members respectively because 21 is 70% out of expected 30.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hint: If you need to customize the 70% ratio used in these calculations on your site, ask your administrator to set the constant `AUTOGROUP_MIN_RATIO` in the main config.php.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 define(&#039;AUTOGROUP_MIN_RATIO&#039;, 0.95); // Means the smallest group will have at least 95% of the expected size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Group members===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Select members from ...&#039;&#039; allows you to choose from roles assigned within the course, available cohorts, groups or groupings.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Specify&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Group/Member count&#039;&#039;&#039; work together.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The setting &#039;Select members from cohort&#039; lists all cohorts which users enrolled on the current course are part of. The number in brackets is the number of users enrolled on the course in that cohort.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;Ignore users in groups&#039; checkbox should be ticked to only select group members from users that are NOT already in a group in the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;Include only active enrolments&#039; checkbox provides the option to choose whether to include suspended users in groups. The checkbox is only displayed to users with the [[Capabilities/moodle/course:viewsuspendedusers|capability to view suspended users]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grouping===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Create in grouping&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Grouping name&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to create a new grouping and allocate the new auto-created groups to be created to it.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prior to creating the groups, you can view the groups.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Restricting an activity, resource or course topic to a particular group==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:group restriction.png|frame|Restricting an activity to a particular group]]&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to restrict an activity, resource or course topic to a group, [[Restrict access]] must be enabled. This will result in a &#039;Restrict access&#039; section in the activity, resource or topic settings and a group restriction can then be added.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Groups and enrol plugins==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where groups are created automatically with enrol plugins such as  IMS Enterprise, members cannot be unenrolled manually via the groups screen inside a course. This has to be done from the plugin. Additionally, when group members are owned by a plugin like this, there is information below their name on the groups screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Groups overview==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A overview of groups and groupings is available via the Overview tab in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Groups&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table may be filtered to display particular [[Groupings|groupings]] or groups and it will also display students who are not in a group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Groups capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/course:managegroups|Manage groups]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/site:accessallgroups|Access all groups]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/calendar:managegroupentries|Manage group calendar entries]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Upload users]] - for importing users into groups&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Enrolment key]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/plugins/local_autogroup Autogroup additionalplugin] - A local plugin which automatically assigns enrolled users on a course into groups dependant upon information within their user profile. (Now with custom profile field support - called User Info Field in settings.) This plugin will create, update, and delete groups automatically to match the users on your course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Gruppen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Groupes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:グループ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Grupos]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Capabilities/moodle/course:creategroupconversations&amp;diff=139873</id>
		<title>Capabilities/moodle/course:creategroupconversations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Capabilities/moodle/course:creategroupconversations&amp;diff=139873"/>
		<updated>2021-03-15T14:36:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This capability allows the user to enable group messaging when creating a course group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is allowed by default for the roles of [[Teacher]] and [[Manager]] and not set for other roles. Someone with this capability must ensure they are also a member of the group in order to see the messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Capabilities/moodle/course:creategroupconversations]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Images&amp;diff=139709</id>
		<title>Images</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Images&amp;diff=139709"/>
		<updated>2021-02-20T19:49:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Working with media}}&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle allows teachers and students to upload and display images from a variety of  sources via the image icon of the [[Atto editor]]. Course pages can be enhanced with images (or banners) in each section. Assignments can include images for extra clarification.  Images attached to forum posts or quiz questions will appear embedded. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{MediaPlayer | url = https://youtu.be/LbI3dTQCL_o | desc = Adding images}}&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle accepts .jpg,.png,.svg and .gif formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Dragging and dropping an image== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Images may be dragged and dropped directly into  the [[Atto editor]]  if you are using a supported browser (not IE 9, Safari 6 or below or earlier versions of Firefox) and can be dragged and dropped directly onto the course page if the editing is turned on  and  &#039;media drag and  drop&amp;quot; is enabled in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Label&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* See [[Using Label]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Copying and pasting an image==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Moodle 3.9 onwards, images can be copied from anywhere and pasted into the [[Atto editor]]. For example, you can copy and paste an image from a word-processed document or  take a screenshot, copy it to your clipboard and then paste it into the Atto editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Uploading and displaying an image from your computer==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039; It is a good idea to resize your image before uploading, rather than altering its dimensions online.&lt;br /&gt;
*With the editing turned on, go to where you want to display your image (e.g. in a course summary, label or page)&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the image icon as below&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ImageIcon310.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Either enter the URL of an image which is already online or click &#039;Browse repositories&#039; to access the File picker&lt;br /&gt;
*Click [[Upload a file]]. Browse for and upload your image. For more information, see [[File picker]] &lt;br /&gt;
*Either add a description of the image or tick/check the box &#039;This image is decorative only&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Alter the size and alignment if needed and save the image&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ImageUpload310.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing an uploaded image==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to edit the image once it has been uploaded,you can double-click on the image from within the [[Text editor| Atto text editor]] and access the image properties window. &#039;&#039;Note it is much better to upload an image of the desired size rather than modifying it afterwards.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displaying an image already online==&lt;br /&gt;
If you have images available elsewhere online, you can display them too without the need to upload to Moodle by entering their online address in the Enter URL field. &#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039; If the image is taken offline, it will be replaced by a red X on your course page.  Linking [http://simple.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hot-linking] to images online if you don&#039;t own them yourself is not recommended.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Bilder]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Imágenes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Images]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Talk:Keyholder_role&amp;diff=139681</id>
		<title>Talk:Keyholder role</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Talk:Keyholder_role&amp;diff=139681"/>
		<updated>2021-02-15T19:27:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: replying to Randy&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Whoever put the Norman Bates with the shower icon as the keyholder: are you sure your mother would approve? ;) --[[User:Randy Thornton|Randy Thornton]] ([[User talk:Randy Thornton|talk]]) 19:18, 15 February&lt;br /&gt;
2021 (UTC)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Guilty as charged :) It was a long time ago though. If you think I should update the image I&#039;m happy to do so, now I&#039;m older and less light-hearted! --[[User:Mary Cooch|Mary Cooch]] ([[User talk:Mary Cooch|talk]]) 19:27, 15 February 2021 (UTC)&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Groups&amp;diff=139672</id>
		<title>Groups</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Groups&amp;diff=139672"/>
		<updated>2021-02-12T07:20:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* Why use groups? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Grouping users}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Why use groups?==&lt;br /&gt;
*You are a teacher in a course where you have several classes and you want to filter your activities and gradebook so you only see one class at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
*You are a teacher sharing a course with other teachers and you want to filter your activities and gradebook so you don’t see the students from your colleagues’ classes.&lt;br /&gt;
*You want to allocate a particular activity, resource or topic section to just one class or set of users and you don’t want others to see it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{MediaPlayer | url = https://youtu.be/X9aQ2TiYXs0| desc = How to add groups to courses}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*This [https://youtu.be/pKAFWItexUY screencast about using groups] also highlights the benefits of using groups.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Group levels==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:groupmodecourse.png|thumb|Groups settings in course settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
A group or grouping can be used on two levels:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Course level - The group mode defined at the course level is the default mode for all activities defined within that course.  To use groups you need first to set a group mode in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Edit settings.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Activity level - Each activity that supports groups can also have its own group mode defined. If the course  setting &amp;quot;Force group mode&amp;quot; is set to &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot; then the option to define the group mode for individual activities is not available. If it is set to &amp;quot;No&amp;quot;, then the teacher may change the group mode:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Group modes===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three group modes &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*No groups - There are no sub groups, everyone is part of one big community&lt;br /&gt;
*Separate groups - Each group can only see their own group, others are invisible.&lt;br /&gt;
*Visible groups - Each group works in their own group, but can also see other groups. (The other groups&#039; work is read-only.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, enabling either separate or visible groups on an assignment drop-box enables staff to filter the student submissions to see only those from a particular tutor group. With visible groups, students can see which other groups are doing the same activities as they are; with separate groups, they do not know which other groups are doing the same activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using groups with discussion forums allow teachers to restrict interaction between students. Separate groups mean only students in the same group can see and participate in discussions within a particular forum. Visible groups allow students to see other group&#039;s discussions, but only participate in their own group&#039;s discussions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Where visible groups are used or the participant can access all groups, the user&#039;s own group is shown first, followed by other groups:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:mygroupsfirst.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a group==&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;Create group&#039;&#039; button:&lt;br /&gt;
## (using the Boost theme) select &#039;&#039;Participants&#039;&#039; from the navigation drawer, click the &#039;&#039;⚙&#039;&#039; (actions menu) on the right, then &#039;&#039;Groups&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
## (using the Classic theme) &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Groups&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Add a group name and optional description (displayed above the list of group members on the participants page), [[Enrolment key|enrolment key]] and picture (displayed on the participants page and next to forum posts)&lt;br /&gt;
#Tick the box Enable group messaging if you wish to enage in group conversations. You will then be able to send group messages from the messaging drawer. See [[Messaging]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &#039;Save changes&#039; button&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the group to which you want to add participants, then click the &#039;Add/remove users button&lt;br /&gt;
# In the &amp;quot;Potential members&amp;quot; list, select the users you want to add to the group. Multiple users may be selected using the Crtl key.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Add button to add the users to the group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An optional group ID number (an advanced setting) may be added for matching the group against external systems. Group ID numbers are not displayed anywhere on the site. Within a course, all group ID numbers must be unique. Thus it&#039;s not possible to create a group with a duplicate group ID number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In Moodle 3.8, a default group icon is displayed in forum posts when there is no group picture set (MDL-67959). A workaround to the problem is to hide the picture in the group settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Auto-create groups==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:autocreategroups.png|thumb|Auto-create groups]]&lt;br /&gt;
Groups may be created automatically via the &#039;Auto-create groups&#039; button in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Groups&#039;&#039;. To see all the settings, click the &#039;&#039;Expand all&#039;&#039; link top right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General===&lt;br /&gt;
A &#039;&#039;&#039;naming scheme&#039;&#039;&#039; can be created automatically.  # is replaced by sequential numbers, and @ by letters.  For example:  &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;Group @&#039;&#039; will create group with a naming scheme Group A, Group B, Group C . . .&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;Group #&#039;&#039; will create group with a naming scheme Group 1, Group 2, Group 3 . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can specify if you would like to  create &lt;br /&gt;
*x number of Groups or &lt;br /&gt;
*each group contain x number of students&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Prevent last small group ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When selecting &#039;&#039;&#039;Members per group&#039;&#039;&#039;, depending on the number of users in the course, the last group can end up with significantly fewer members than expected. You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;Prevent last small group&#039;&#039;&#039; to avoid the situation. If the last group would be smaller than 70% of the expected size, it will not be created. Instead, Moodle will allocate additional members to existing groups rather then create a new group with few members.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example 1:&lt;br /&gt;
:You have a course with 80 students and you let auto-create groups with 30 members per group. There would be just 20 students in the third group which is 66% out of expected 30. Moodle will auto-create only two groups with 40 students in each.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example 2: &lt;br /&gt;
:You have a course with 81 students and you let auto-create groups with 30 members per group. Moodle will create three groups with 30, 30 and 21 members respectively because 21 is 70% out of expected 30.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hint: If you need to customize the 70% ratio used in these calculations on your site, ask your administrator to set the constant `AUTOGROUP_MIN_RATIO` in the main config.php.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 define(&#039;AUTOGROUP_MIN_RATIO&#039;, 0.95); // Means the smallest group will have at least 95% of the expected size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Group members===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Select members from ...&#039;&#039; allows you to choose from roles assigned within the course, available cohorts, groups or groupings.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Specify&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Group/Member count&#039;&#039;&#039; work together.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The setting &#039;Select members from cohort&#039; lists all cohorts which users enrolled on the current course are part of. The number in brackets is the number of users enrolled on the course in that cohort.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;Ignore users in groups&#039; checkbox should be ticked to only select group members from users that are NOT already in a group in the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;Include only active enrolments&#039; checkbox provides the option to choose whether to include suspended users in groups. The checkbox is only displayed to users with the [[Capabilities/moodle/course:viewsuspendedusers|capability to view suspended users]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grouping===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Create in grouping&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Grouping name&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to create a new grouping and allocate the new auto-created groups to be created to it.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prior to creating the groups, you can view the groups.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Restricting an activity, resource or course topic to a particular group==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:group restriction.png|frame|Restricting an activity to a particular group]]&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to restrict an activity, resource or course topic to a group, [[Restrict access]] must be enabled. This will result in a &#039;Restrict access&#039; section in the activity, resource or topic settings and a group restriction can then be added.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Groups and enrol plugins==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where groups are created automatically with enrol plugins such as  IMS Enterprise, members cannot be unenrolled manually via the groups screen inside a course. This has to be done from the plugin. Additionally, when group members are owned by a plugin like this, there is information below their name on the groups screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Groups overview==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A overview of groups and groupings is available via the Overview tab in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Groups&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table may be filtered to display particular [[Groupings|groupings]] or groups and it will also display students who are not in a group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Groups capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/course:managegroups|Manage groups]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/site:accessallgroups|Access all groups]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/calendar:managegroupentries|Manage group calendar entries]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Upload users]] - for importing users into groups&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Enrolment key]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/plugins/local_autogroup Autogroup additionalplugin] - A local plugin which automatically assigns enrolled users on a course into groups dependant upon information within their user profile. (Now with custom profile field support - called User Info Field in settings.) This plugin will create, update, and delete groups automatically to match the users on your course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Gruppen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Groupes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:グループ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Grupos]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Data_privacy&amp;diff=139668</id>
		<title>Data privacy</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Data_privacy&amp;diff=139668"/>
		<updated>2021-02-11T07:59:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: adding a note about Windows&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Privacy}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Data privacy functionality provides the workflow for users to submit a data request (also known as a subject access request or SAR) and for the site administrator or privacy officer to process these requests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Privacy officer role==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is recommended that you create a [[Privacy officer role]] and assign it to the person responsible. If there is nobody on the site with the role of privacy officer i.e. nobody with the capability to manage data requests, then a site admin can respond to data requests and manage the data registry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Data requests==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:requesting data.png|thumb|Requesting data]]&lt;br /&gt;
Any user can send a message to the privacy officer via the &#039;Contact the privacy officer&#039; link on their profile page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, they can request a copy of all of their personal data or request that their personal data should be deleted as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to your profile page (via the user menu).&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the link &#039;Data requests&#039; then click the &#039;New request&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &#039;Export all of my personal data&#039; or &#039;Delete all of my personal data&#039; as appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request approved.png|thumb|Request approved]]&lt;br /&gt;
The privacy officer will then receive a data request notification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user has requested a copy of all of their personal data, once the request is approved, they will receive a notification to inform them that their personal data may be downloaded from their Data requests page. In Moodle 3.5.2 onwards, the user has by default one week to download their data before the download link expires. (An administrator can set a different expiry time for the data request in &#039;Privacy settings&#039; in the Site administration.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Users on Windows computers are advised to use a program such as 7zip to extract their data from the downloaded folder, as the standard Windows unzipping feature will display an error message.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user has requested that their personal data should be deleted, once the request is approved, they will receive an email to inform them and they will no longer be able to log in to the site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Responding to data requests==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:viewing a data request.png|thumb|Viewing a data request]]&lt;br /&gt;
The privacy officer can respond to data requests as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;Data requests&#039; in the Site administration (or follow the link in the data request notification).&lt;br /&gt;
# In the Actions dropdown, select View, Approve, or Deny as appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user has sent a message, the privacy officer can view the message and copy the user&#039;s email address, then reply via email. In Moodle 3.5.2 onwards, after replying they can mark it as complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Automatic approval of data export and deletion requests==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Data export and deletion requests may be automatically approved, rather than the privacy officer having to manually approve each one. This feature may be enabled in Site administration / Users / Privacy and policies / Privacy settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Deletion of user data==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a user&#039;s data is deleted, any forum posts are blanked and replaced with a sentence stating that the post has been removed. However, if the user started any discussions, their name is currently still shown on the forum page (MDL-62865).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Allowing only the privacy officer to download data==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Moodle 3.5.2 onwards, organisations with multiple systems and a centralised request process can prevent users from downloading their own data and instead enable a privacy officer to download it for them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;Define roles&#039; in the Site administration.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the authenticated user role unset the capability [[Capabilities/tool/dataprivacy:downloadownrequest|Download your own exported data]] and save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the privacy officer role allow the capability [[Capabilities/tool/dataprivacy:downloadallrequests|Download exported data for everyone]]  and save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The privacy officer can then make a data request on behalf of a user (via &#039;Data requests&#039; in the Site administration), approve it and later download it via the Actions dropdown menu. In this situation, the privacy officer will receive notification messages and NOT the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Data registry==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:data registry.png|thumb|Data registry]]&lt;br /&gt;
The privacy officer can set purposes (why the organisation is processing data) with retention periods and categories for data stored in Moodle in the data registry. Different types of data may need to be stored for different lengths of time. For example, student submissions to an assessment may need to be retained indefinitely to be able to provide evidence of student accomplishments, whereas general coursework such as forum posts might only be retained until graduation + 12 months.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A default purpose and retention period may be set for course categories, courses, activity modules and blocks. The retention period is measured from the course end date for the course that an activity is in. For a user it is from the last login time for any user who is no longer enrolled (or has already been deleted).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Example categories===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Administrative: Civil status, identity, identification data, images …&lt;br /&gt;
* Personal life (lifestyle, family situation, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Economic and financial information (income, financial situation, tax situation, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Connection data (IP address, logs, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Educational Data (Assessed Coursework, exam scripts etc)&lt;br /&gt;
* Records of Education Attainment (Results of exams, assessments, qualifications awarded etc)&lt;br /&gt;
* Location data (travel, GPS data, GSM, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Data registry set-up===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add purposes and categories:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;Data registry&#039; in the Site administration.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the Edit menu select Categories.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the &#039;Edit categories&#039; page, click the + button to add a new category.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter a category name and description then click the Save button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;Data registry&#039; again and in the Edit menu select Purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the &#039;Edit purposes&#039; page, click the + button to add a new purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter a purpose name, description and retention period then click the Save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Purposes and categories need to be created before they can be set as defaults. Note that default data registry categories and purposes are only applied to all newly created instances of that type (a course for example). Any content that has been created before defaults are set are not impacted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To set default categories and purposes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# In &#039;Data registry&#039; in the Site administration click the &#039;Set defaults&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select a default category and purpose for the site, and for users, course categories, courses, activity modules and blocks as required.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Setting categories and purposes for existing contexts ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Data registry interface is used for navigation the contexts of the site to set the category and purpose for them, and thus the data retention period for that context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the very least, the site admin should set the category and purpose at the site level. Once this is saved, all lower contexts will inherit from that level. The admin can then choose to set different category and purposes for different levels of context, such as having a specific course with a longer or shorter retention period thus overriding the inherited values.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Data deletion==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Data deletion page (Site administration / Users / Privacy and policies / Data deletion) lists the contexts that are past their allocated retention period and need to be confirmed for user data deletion. Once the selected contexts have been confirmed for deletion, the user data related to these contexts will be deleted on the next execution of the &amp;quot;Delete expired contexts&amp;quot; [[Scheduled tasks|scheduled task]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/tool/dataprivacy:managedataregistry|Manage data registry]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/tool/dataprivacy:managedatarequests|Manage data requests]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/tool/dataprivacy:makedatarequestsforchildren|Make data requests for children]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/tool/dataprivacy:downloadallrequests|Download exported data for everyone]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/tool/dataprivacy:downloadownrequest|Download your own exported data]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/tool/dataprivacy:makedatadeletionrequestsforchildren|Request data deletion for minors]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/tool/dataprivacy:requestdelete|Request data deletion for yourself]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/tool/dataprivacy:requestdeleteforotheruser|Request data deletion on behalf of another user]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Plugin privacy registry==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Plugin privacy registry (Site administration / Users / Privacy and policies / Plugin privacy registry) lists all plugins in Moodle, and identifies whether they comply with the privacy API or not. Any plugins which are flagged with the warning icon do not yet implement the Moodle privacy API. If this plugin stores any personal data it will not be able to be exported or deleted through Moodle&#039;s privacy system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Privacy]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Privacidad de datos]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datenschutz]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Plugin Data Privacy]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Data_privacy&amp;diff=139667</id>
		<title>Data privacy</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Data_privacy&amp;diff=139667"/>
		<updated>2021-02-11T07:58:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: adding a note about Windows&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Privacy}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Data privacy functionality provides the workflow for users to submit a data request (also known as a subject access request or SAR) and for the site administrator or privacy officer to process these requests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Privacy officer role==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is recommended that you create a [[Privacy officer role]] and assign it to the person responsible. If there is nobody on the site with the role of privacy officer i.e. nobody with the capability to manage data requests, then a site admin can respond to data requests and manage the data registry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Data requests==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:requesting data.png|thumb|Requesting data]]&lt;br /&gt;
Any user can send a message to the privacy officer via the &#039;Contact the privacy officer&#039; link on their profile page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, they can request a copy of all of their personal data or request that their personal data should be deleted as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to your profile page (via the user menu).&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the link &#039;Data requests&#039; then click the &#039;New request&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &#039;Export all of my personal data&#039; or &#039;Delete all of my personal data&#039; as appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request approved.png|thumb|Request approved]]&lt;br /&gt;
The privacy officer will then receive a data request notification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user has requested a copy of all of their personal data, once the request is approved, they will receive a notification to inform them that their personal data may be downloaded from their Data requests page. In Moodle 3.5.2 onwards, the user has by default one week to download their data before the download link expires. (An administrator can set a different expiry time for the data request in &#039;Privacy settings&#039; in the Site administration.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that users on Windows computers are advised to use a program such as 7zip to extract their data from the downloaded folder, as the standard Windows unzipping feature will display an error message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user has requested that their personal data should be deleted, once the request is approved, they will receive an email to inform them and they will no longer be able to log in to the site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Responding to data requests==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:viewing a data request.png|thumb|Viewing a data request]]&lt;br /&gt;
The privacy officer can respond to data requests as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;Data requests&#039; in the Site administration (or follow the link in the data request notification).&lt;br /&gt;
# In the Actions dropdown, select View, Approve, or Deny as appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user has sent a message, the privacy officer can view the message and copy the user&#039;s email address, then reply via email. In Moodle 3.5.2 onwards, after replying they can mark it as complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Automatic approval of data export and deletion requests==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Data export and deletion requests may be automatically approved, rather than the privacy officer having to manually approve each one. This feature may be enabled in Site administration / Users / Privacy and policies / Privacy settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Deletion of user data==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a user&#039;s data is deleted, any forum posts are blanked and replaced with a sentence stating that the post has been removed. However, if the user started any discussions, their name is currently still shown on the forum page (MDL-62865).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Allowing only the privacy officer to download data==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Moodle 3.5.2 onwards, organisations with multiple systems and a centralised request process can prevent users from downloading their own data and instead enable a privacy officer to download it for them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;Define roles&#039; in the Site administration.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the authenticated user role unset the capability [[Capabilities/tool/dataprivacy:downloadownrequest|Download your own exported data]] and save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the privacy officer role allow the capability [[Capabilities/tool/dataprivacy:downloadallrequests|Download exported data for everyone]]  and save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The privacy officer can then make a data request on behalf of a user (via &#039;Data requests&#039; in the Site administration), approve it and later download it via the Actions dropdown menu. In this situation, the privacy officer will receive notification messages and NOT the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Data registry==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:data registry.png|thumb|Data registry]]&lt;br /&gt;
The privacy officer can set purposes (why the organisation is processing data) with retention periods and categories for data stored in Moodle in the data registry. Different types of data may need to be stored for different lengths of time. For example, student submissions to an assessment may need to be retained indefinitely to be able to provide evidence of student accomplishments, whereas general coursework such as forum posts might only be retained until graduation + 12 months.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A default purpose and retention period may be set for course categories, courses, activity modules and blocks. The retention period is measured from the course end date for the course that an activity is in. For a user it is from the last login time for any user who is no longer enrolled (or has already been deleted).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Example categories===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Administrative: Civil status, identity, identification data, images …&lt;br /&gt;
* Personal life (lifestyle, family situation, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Economic and financial information (income, financial situation, tax situation, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Connection data (IP address, logs, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Educational Data (Assessed Coursework, exam scripts etc)&lt;br /&gt;
* Records of Education Attainment (Results of exams, assessments, qualifications awarded etc)&lt;br /&gt;
* Location data (travel, GPS data, GSM, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Data registry set-up===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add purposes and categories:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;Data registry&#039; in the Site administration.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the Edit menu select Categories.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the &#039;Edit categories&#039; page, click the + button to add a new category.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter a category name and description then click the Save button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;Data registry&#039; again and in the Edit menu select Purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the &#039;Edit purposes&#039; page, click the + button to add a new purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter a purpose name, description and retention period then click the Save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Purposes and categories need to be created before they can be set as defaults. Note that default data registry categories and purposes are only applied to all newly created instances of that type (a course for example). Any content that has been created before defaults are set are not impacted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To set default categories and purposes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# In &#039;Data registry&#039; in the Site administration click the &#039;Set defaults&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select a default category and purpose for the site, and for users, course categories, courses, activity modules and blocks as required.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Setting categories and purposes for existing contexts ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Data registry interface is used for navigation the contexts of the site to set the category and purpose for them, and thus the data retention period for that context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the very least, the site admin should set the category and purpose at the site level. Once this is saved, all lower contexts will inherit from that level. The admin can then choose to set different category and purposes for different levels of context, such as having a specific course with a longer or shorter retention period thus overriding the inherited values.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Data deletion==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Data deletion page (Site administration / Users / Privacy and policies / Data deletion) lists the contexts that are past their allocated retention period and need to be confirmed for user data deletion. Once the selected contexts have been confirmed for deletion, the user data related to these contexts will be deleted on the next execution of the &amp;quot;Delete expired contexts&amp;quot; [[Scheduled tasks|scheduled task]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/tool/dataprivacy:managedataregistry|Manage data registry]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/tool/dataprivacy:managedatarequests|Manage data requests]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/tool/dataprivacy:makedatarequestsforchildren|Make data requests for children]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/tool/dataprivacy:downloadallrequests|Download exported data for everyone]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/tool/dataprivacy:downloadownrequest|Download your own exported data]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/tool/dataprivacy:makedatadeletionrequestsforchildren|Request data deletion for minors]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/tool/dataprivacy:requestdelete|Request data deletion for yourself]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/tool/dataprivacy:requestdeleteforotheruser|Request data deletion on behalf of another user]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Plugin privacy registry==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Plugin privacy registry (Site administration / Users / Privacy and policies / Plugin privacy registry) lists all plugins in Moodle, and identifies whether they comply with the privacy API or not. Any plugins which are flagged with the warning icon do not yet implement the Moodle privacy API. If this plugin stores any personal data it will not be able to be exported or deleted through Moodle&#039;s privacy system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Privacy]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Privacidad de datos]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datenschutz]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Plugin Data Privacy]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Front_page_settings&amp;diff=139665</id>
		<title>Front page settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Front_page_settings&amp;diff=139665"/>
		<updated>2021-02-10T10:50:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: removing out of date screenshots&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Front page}}The site&#039;s [[Front page]] is similar to a course page. The front page settings can be found in &#039;Front page settings&#039; in the Site administration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Full site name===&lt;br /&gt;
This name appears at the top of every page above the navigation bar.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:demositefrontpage01.png|frame|center|Front page full site name]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Short name for site===&lt;br /&gt;
The short name appears at the beginning of the navigation bar as a link back to your site front page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Front page summary===&lt;br /&gt;
This summary can be displayed on the left or right of the front page using the course/site summary block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The summary is also used as the HTML metadata description in some themes, for the front page of the site.  This is not generally seen by users, but can be useful for search engines that index the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Front page and Front page items when logged in===&lt;br /&gt;
The centre of the front page can display any combination of the following: news items, a list of courses, a list of enrolled courses, a list of course categories, a list of categories and courses, a course search box or none.  The order is determined by a combination box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to create one setting for anyone who gets to the front page without logging in to the Moodle site, and another look for only those who have logged into the Moodle site.  There are two combination boxes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An alternative option for logged-in users is their [[Dashboard|dashboard]] (can be set in Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Navigation)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum category depth===&lt;br /&gt;
This specifies the maximum depth of child categories expanded when displaying categories or combo list. Deeper level categories will appear as links and user can expand them with AJAX request.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum number of courses===&lt;br /&gt;
Maximum number of courses to be displayed on the site&#039;s front page in course listings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Include a topic section===&lt;br /&gt;
This adds a topic section to the centre-top of the front page. When editing is turned on, resources and/or activities can be added to the topic section using the dropdown menus, in the same way as on a course page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Note: The label resource can be used to add text and/or an image to the centre-top of the front page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===News items to show===&lt;br /&gt;
This setting only applies if the front page is set to display news items or if you are using the [[Latest announcements block]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Comments per page===&lt;br /&gt;
Each course may include a [[Comments block]] which allows the display of user comments. The number of comments displayed at any time is set here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default front page role===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default front page role enables logged-in users to participate in front page activities. See &#039;How do I enable logged-in users to participate in front page activities?&#039; in [[Front page FAQ]] for more details. It is recommended that it is set to &#039;Authenticated user on frontpage&#039;. It can also be set to Student. It should not be set to Guest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front Page roles==&lt;br /&gt;
As in a course, you can assign users [[Roles|roles]] just in the [[Context|context]] of this page.  Note this is different from the default Authenticated User on Front Page role found in front page settings. As a security issue, usually only admins can modify the front page, other users do not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to upload users as students in the front page with a csv file using the site short name as &#039;course1&#039; field, student in &#039;role1&#039; field (and, if needed, chosen group name in &#039;group1&#039; field.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front Page backup==&lt;br /&gt;
You can backup the front page, similar to a [[Course backup]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front Page restore==&lt;br /&gt;
As in a course, you can [[Restore]] a backed up version of the front page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front Page questions==&lt;br /&gt;
The [[Question bank]] is accessible from the Front Page. For example, if &amp;quot;topic&amp;quot; is checked in the front page settings, you can add a [[Quiz module]] activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tips and Tricks==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Moodle site&#039;s front page can be reconfigured from the default standard to give it a different look and or change how it functions.  Depending upon the changes, this can be a simple or a more complex process. See [[Front page FAQ]] for some ideas on customising your front page.&lt;br /&gt;
====Central area, Courses or Categories?====&lt;br /&gt;
This is a major decision, what is it you want in the centre of your front page? You can have a list of categories, a list of categories and courses, or neither, a label with a table full of images works just as well. The issue is always the same, actually, what looks good.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Clean look, topic checked, no blocks====&lt;br /&gt;
The standard Moodle page format of [[Block]]s on the left and blocks on the right is not always appropriate or considered pretty. The [[Administrator|site administrator]] can change this basic format by simply deleting or hiding blocks that can be seen by users. Navigation can be placed on the dock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The two column format====&lt;br /&gt;
The Administrator decides which blocks should appear on the front page and moves all of them to the left or right side. This format allows you to decide what you want in the centre, and where you want the blocks, left or right.  &lt;br /&gt;
:Tip: It is possible to force a block column to assume a specific width.  For example, placing an image of 400 px in a block will force that column to 400 px.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The clean look example====&lt;br /&gt;
Some sites want an uncluttered look. A site administrator or designer wants to start with the most basic look and then add features.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The site administrator will turn on editing and hide or delete all blocks that can be see by teachers or students on the front page.&lt;br /&gt;
# Then go to the Front Page settings and:&lt;br /&gt;
## Set the &amp;quot;Front page&amp;quot; list to None, None, None, None &lt;br /&gt;
## Set &amp;quot;Front page items when logged in&amp;quot; list to the same &lt;br /&gt;
## Check the box for &amp;quot;Include Topic section&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
## Save &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above was done with 1 theme, and a simple front page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you&#039;re using a theme such as Clean or More you can then do some cool things with Bootstrap layout elements, as described in the thread [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=267662 LOOK &amp;amp; LEARN: How to add marketing spots as a front page topic].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Block settings==&lt;br /&gt;
Each block has a number of configuration settings that you can change. See [[Managing blocks]] for more details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Other settings that change the look of the Main Page==&lt;br /&gt;
Some components of the Main Page, such as the logo, heading and Navigation bar may be changed by an administrator in Themes in the Site administration and clicking on the theme name. Different themes may have fewer or more options to set. There are some other settings available in  &#039;Theme settings&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Front Page FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Einstellungen_f%C3%BCr_die_Startseite]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones de la portada]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Hasiera-orriaren_ezarpenak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Réglages page d&#039;accueil]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[pl:Ustawienia strony głównej]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Front_page_settings&amp;diff=139664</id>
		<title>Front page settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Front_page_settings&amp;diff=139664"/>
		<updated>2021-02-10T10:49:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* Block settings */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Front page}}The site&#039;s [[Front page]] is similar to a course page. The front page settings can be found in &#039;Front page settings&#039; in the Site administration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Full site name===&lt;br /&gt;
This name appears at the top of every page above the navigation bar.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:demositefrontpage01.png|frame|center|Front page full site name]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Short name for site===&lt;br /&gt;
The short name appears at the beginning of the navigation bar as a link back to your site front page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Front page summary===&lt;br /&gt;
This summary can be displayed on the left or right of the front page using the course/site summary block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The summary is also used as the HTML metadata description in some themes, for the front page of the site.  This is not generally seen by users, but can be useful for search engines that index the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Front page and Front page items when logged in===&lt;br /&gt;
The centre of the front page can display any combination of the following: news items, a list of courses, a list of enrolled courses, a list of course categories, a list of categories and courses, a course search box or none.  The order is determined by a combination box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to create one setting for anyone who gets to the front page without logging in to the Moodle site, and another look for only those who have logged into the Moodle site.  There are two combination boxes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;|Combination boxes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:FrontPage settings frontpage pd.png|thumb|left|frontpage showing pulldown]]&lt;br /&gt;
| The image on the left shows the first Front Page settings dialog - what visitors will see before they log in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The image on the right shows a second front Page settings dialog - what Authenticated Users will see when logged in. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:An alternative option for logged-in users is their [[Dashboard|dashboard]] (can be set in Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Navigation)&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:FrontPage_settings_frontpageloggedin.png|thumb|right|frontpage for login user box]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum category depth===&lt;br /&gt;
This specifies the maximum depth of child categories expanded when displaying categories or combo list. Deeper level categories will appear as links and user can expand them with AJAX request.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum number of courses===&lt;br /&gt;
Maximum number of courses to be displayed on the site&#039;s front page in course listings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Include a topic section===&lt;br /&gt;
This adds a topic section to the centre-top of the front page. When editing is turned on, resources and/or activities can be added to the topic section using the dropdown menus, in the same way as on a course page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Note: The label resource can be used to add text and/or an image to the centre-top of the front page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===News items to show===&lt;br /&gt;
This setting only applies if the front page is set to display news items or if you are using the [[Latest announcements block]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Comments per page===&lt;br /&gt;
Each course may include a [[Comments block]] which allows the display of user comments. The number of comments displayed at any time is set here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default front page role===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default front page role enables logged-in users to participate in front page activities. See &#039;How do I enable logged-in users to participate in front page activities?&#039; in [[Front page FAQ]] for more details. It is recommended that it is set to &#039;Authenticated user on frontpage&#039;. It can also be set to Student. It should not be set to Guest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front Page roles==&lt;br /&gt;
As in a course, you can assign users [[Roles|roles]] just in the [[Context|context]] of this page.  Note this is different from the default Authenticated User on Front Page role found in front page settings. As a security issue, usually only admins can modify the front page, other users do not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to upload users as students in the front page with a csv file using the site short name as &#039;course1&#039; field, student in &#039;role1&#039; field (and, if needed, chosen group name in &#039;group1&#039; field.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front Page backup==&lt;br /&gt;
You can backup the front page, similar to a [[Course backup]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front Page restore==&lt;br /&gt;
As in a course, you can [[Restore]] a backed up version of the front page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front Page questions==&lt;br /&gt;
The [[Question bank]] is accessible from the Front Page. For example, if &amp;quot;topic&amp;quot; is checked in the front page settings, you can add a [[Quiz module]] activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tips and Tricks==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Moodle site&#039;s front page can be reconfigured from the default standard to give it a different look and or change how it functions.  Depending upon the changes, this can be a simple or a more complex process. See [[Front page FAQ]] for some ideas on customising your front page.&lt;br /&gt;
====Central area, Courses or Categories?====&lt;br /&gt;
This is a major decision, what is it you want in the centre of your front page? You can have a list of categories, a list of categories and courses, or neither, a label with a table full of images works just as well. The issue is always the same, actually, what looks good.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Clean look, topic checked, no blocks====&lt;br /&gt;
The standard Moodle page format of [[Block]]s on the left and blocks on the right is not always appropriate or considered pretty. The [[Administrator|site administrator]] can change this basic format by simply deleting or hiding blocks that can be seen by users. Navigation can be placed on the dock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The two column format====&lt;br /&gt;
The Administrator decides which blocks should appear on the front page and moves all of them to the left or right side. This format allows you to decide what you want in the centre, and where you want the blocks, left or right.  &lt;br /&gt;
:Tip: It is possible to force a block column to assume a specific width.  For example, placing an image of 400 px in a block will force that column to 400 px.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The clean look example====&lt;br /&gt;
Some sites want an uncluttered look. A site administrator or designer wants to start with the most basic look and then add features.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The site administrator will turn on editing and hide or delete all blocks that can be see by teachers or students on the front page.&lt;br /&gt;
# Then go to the Front Page settings and:&lt;br /&gt;
## Set the &amp;quot;Front page&amp;quot; list to None, None, None, None &lt;br /&gt;
## Set &amp;quot;Front page items when logged in&amp;quot; list to the same &lt;br /&gt;
## Check the box for &amp;quot;Include Topic section&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
## Save &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above was done with 1 theme, and a simple front page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you&#039;re using a theme such as Clean or More you can then do some cool things with Bootstrap layout elements, as described in the thread [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=267662 LOOK &amp;amp; LEARN: How to add marketing spots as a front page topic].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Block settings==&lt;br /&gt;
Each block has a number of configuration settings that you can change. See [[Managing blocks]] for more details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Other settings that change the look of the Main Page==&lt;br /&gt;
Some components of the Main Page, such as the logo, heading and Navigation bar may be changed by an administrator in Themes in the Site administration and clicking on the theme name. Different themes may have fewer or more options to set. There are some other settings available in  &#039;Theme settings&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Front Page FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Einstellungen_f%C3%BCr_die_Startseite]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones de la portada]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Hasiera-orriaren_ezarpenak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Réglages page d&#039;accueil]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[pl:Ustawienia strony głównej]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Front_page_settings&amp;diff=139663</id>
		<title>Front page settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Front_page_settings&amp;diff=139663"/>
		<updated>2021-02-10T10:49:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: removing out of date screenshots&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Front page}}The site&#039;s [[Front page]] is similar to a course page. The front page settings can be found in &#039;Front page settings&#039; in the Site administration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Full site name===&lt;br /&gt;
This name appears at the top of every page above the navigation bar.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:demositefrontpage01.png|frame|center|Front page full site name]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Short name for site===&lt;br /&gt;
The short name appears at the beginning of the navigation bar as a link back to your site front page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Front page summary===&lt;br /&gt;
This summary can be displayed on the left or right of the front page using the course/site summary block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The summary is also used as the HTML metadata description in some themes, for the front page of the site.  This is not generally seen by users, but can be useful for search engines that index the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Front page and Front page items when logged in===&lt;br /&gt;
The centre of the front page can display any combination of the following: news items, a list of courses, a list of enrolled courses, a list of course categories, a list of categories and courses, a course search box or none.  The order is determined by a combination box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to create one setting for anyone who gets to the front page without logging in to the Moodle site, and another look for only those who have logged into the Moodle site.  There are two combination boxes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;|Combination boxes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:FrontPage settings frontpage pd.png|thumb|left|frontpage showing pulldown]]&lt;br /&gt;
| The image on the left shows the first Front Page settings dialog - what visitors will see before they log in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The image on the right shows a second front Page settings dialog - what Authenticated Users will see when logged in. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:An alternative option for logged-in users is their [[Dashboard|dashboard]] (can be set in Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Navigation)&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:FrontPage_settings_frontpageloggedin.png|thumb|right|frontpage for login user box]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum category depth===&lt;br /&gt;
This specifies the maximum depth of child categories expanded when displaying categories or combo list. Deeper level categories will appear as links and user can expand them with AJAX request.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum number of courses===&lt;br /&gt;
Maximum number of courses to be displayed on the site&#039;s front page in course listings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Include a topic section===&lt;br /&gt;
This adds a topic section to the centre-top of the front page. When editing is turned on, resources and/or activities can be added to the topic section using the dropdown menus, in the same way as on a course page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Note: The label resource can be used to add text and/or an image to the centre-top of the front page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===News items to show===&lt;br /&gt;
This setting only applies if the front page is set to display news items or if you are using the [[Latest announcements block]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Comments per page===&lt;br /&gt;
Each course may include a [[Comments block]] which allows the display of user comments. The number of comments displayed at any time is set here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default front page role===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default front page role enables logged-in users to participate in front page activities. See &#039;How do I enable logged-in users to participate in front page activities?&#039; in [[Front page FAQ]] for more details. It is recommended that it is set to &#039;Authenticated user on frontpage&#039;. It can also be set to Student. It should not be set to Guest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front Page roles==&lt;br /&gt;
As in a course, you can assign users [[Roles|roles]] just in the [[Context|context]] of this page.  Note this is different from the default Authenticated User on Front Page role found in front page settings. As a security issue, usually only admins can modify the front page, other users do not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to upload users as students in the front page with a csv file using the site short name as &#039;course1&#039; field, student in &#039;role1&#039; field (and, if needed, chosen group name in &#039;group1&#039; field.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front Page backup==&lt;br /&gt;
You can backup the front page, similar to a [[Course backup]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front Page restore==&lt;br /&gt;
As in a course, you can [[Restore]] a backed up version of the front page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front Page questions==&lt;br /&gt;
The [[Question bank]] is accessible from the Front Page. For example, if &amp;quot;topic&amp;quot; is checked in the front page settings, you can add a [[Quiz module]] activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tips and Tricks==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Moodle site&#039;s front page can be reconfigured from the default standard to give it a different look and or change how it functions.  Depending upon the changes, this can be a simple or a more complex process. See [[Front page FAQ]] for some ideas on customising your front page.&lt;br /&gt;
====Central area, Courses or Categories?====&lt;br /&gt;
This is a major decision, what is it you want in the centre of your front page? You can have a list of categories, a list of categories and courses, or neither, a label with a table full of images works just as well. The issue is always the same, actually, what looks good.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Clean look, topic checked, no blocks====&lt;br /&gt;
The standard Moodle page format of [[Block]]s on the left and blocks on the right is not always appropriate or considered pretty. The [[Administrator|site administrator]] can change this basic format by simply deleting or hiding blocks that can be seen by users. Navigation can be placed on the dock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The two column format====&lt;br /&gt;
The Administrator decides which blocks should appear on the front page and moves all of them to the left or right side. This format allows you to decide what you want in the centre, and where you want the blocks, left or right.  &lt;br /&gt;
:Tip: It is possible to force a block column to assume a specific width.  For example, placing an image of 400 px in a block will force that column to 400 px.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The clean look example====&lt;br /&gt;
Some sites want an uncluttered look. A site administrator or designer wants to start with the most basic look and then add features.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The site administrator will turn on editing and hide or delete all blocks that can be see by teachers or students on the front page.&lt;br /&gt;
# Then go to the Front Page settings and:&lt;br /&gt;
## Set the &amp;quot;Front page&amp;quot; list to None, None, None, None &lt;br /&gt;
## Set &amp;quot;Front page items when logged in&amp;quot; list to the same &lt;br /&gt;
## Check the box for &amp;quot;Include Topic section&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
## Save &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above was done with 1 theme, and a simple front page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you&#039;re using a theme such as Clean or More you can then do some cool things with Bootstrap layout elements, as described in the thread [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=267662 LOOK &amp;amp; LEARN: How to add marketing spots as a front page topic].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Block settings==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Editconfigblock.png|thumb|200px|right|Editing block settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
Each block has a number of configuration settings that you can change. See [[Managing blocks]] for more details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Other settings that change the look of the Main Page==&lt;br /&gt;
Some components of the Main Page, such as the logo, heading and Navigation bar may be changed by an administrator in Themes in the Site administration and clicking on the theme name. Different themes may have fewer or more options to set. There are some other settings available in  &#039;Theme settings&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Front Page FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Einstellungen_f%C3%BCr_die_Startseite]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones de la portada]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Hasiera-orriaren_ezarpenak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Réglages page d&#039;accueil]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[pl:Ustawienia strony głównej]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Images&amp;diff=139662</id>
		<title>Images</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Images&amp;diff=139662"/>
		<updated>2021-02-10T10:45:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: updated image&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Working with media}}&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle allows teachers and students to upload and display images from a variety of  sources via the image icon of the [[Atto editor]]. Course pages can be enhanced with images (or banners) in each section. Assignments can include images for extra clarification.  Images attached to forum posts or quiz questions will appear embedded. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{MediaPlayer | url = https://youtu.be/fEtGcVz0pzE | desc = Adding images}}&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle accepts .jpg,.png,.svg and .gif formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Dragging and dropping an image== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Images may be dragged and dropped directly into  the [[Atto editor]]  if you are using a supported browser (not IE 9, Safari 6 or below or earlier versions of Firefox) and can be dragged and dropped directly onto the course page if the editing is turned on  and  &#039;media drag and  drop&amp;quot; is enabled in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Label&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* See [[Using Label]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Copying and pasting an image==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Moodle 3.9 onwards, images can be copied from anywhere and pasted into the [[Atto editor]]. For example, you can take a screenshot, copy it to your clipboard and then paste it into the Atto editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Uploading and displaying an image from your computer==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039; It is a good idea to resize your image before uploading, rather than altering its dimensions online.&lt;br /&gt;
*With the editing turned on, go to where you want to display your image (e.g. in a course summary, label or page)&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the image icon as below&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ImageIcon310.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Either enter the URL of an image which is already online or click &#039;Browse repositories&#039; to access the File picker&lt;br /&gt;
*Click [[Upload a file]]. Browse for and upload your image. For more information, see [[File picker]] &lt;br /&gt;
*Either add a description of the image or tick/check the box &#039;This image is decorative only&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Alter the size and alignment if needed and save the image&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ImageUpload310.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing an uploaded image==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to edit the image once it has been uploaded,you can double-click on the image from within the [[Text editor| Atto text editor]] and access the image properties window. &#039;&#039;Note it is much better to upload an image of the desired size rather than modifying it afterwards.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displaying an image already online==&lt;br /&gt;
If you have images available elsewhere online, you can display them too without the need to upload to Moodle by entering their online address in the Enter URL field. &#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039; If the image is taken offline, it will be replaced by a red X on your course page.  Linking [http://simple.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hot-linking] to images online if you don&#039;t own them yourself is not recommended.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Bilder]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Imágenes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Images]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=File:ImageIcon310.png&amp;diff=139661</id>
		<title>File:ImageIcon310.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=File:ImageIcon310.png&amp;diff=139661"/>
		<updated>2021-02-10T10:44:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=File:ImageUpload310.png&amp;diff=139660</id>
		<title>File:ImageUpload310.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=File:ImageUpload310.png&amp;diff=139660"/>
		<updated>2021-02-10T10:42:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Audio&amp;diff=139659</id>
		<title>Audio</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Audio&amp;diff=139659"/>
		<updated>2021-02-10T10:40:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* Recording short audio messages */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Working with media}}&lt;br /&gt;
Audio is a very powerful tool to use in a Moodle course. Teachers and students can use audio actively, by recording short messages directly into the Atto editor. Teachers can also display audio so students can, for example to catch up on missed lectures, learn from podcasts, or improve their language skills by listening to native speakers interact. To use audio in Moodle to best effect,  the [[Multimedia plugins filter]] must be enabled. For hints on creating your own audio files, see the [https://docs.moodle.org/32/en/Advanced_Audio Advanced Audio] page.&lt;br /&gt;
==Recording short audio messages==&lt;br /&gt;
 [[File:recordrtcatto.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle&#039;s [[Atto editor]] allows teachers and students to record short audio messages by clicking the relevant icon.( If you don&#039;t see this setting in the Atto editor, ask your administrator to check the [[RecordRTC]] settings.) This feature is also available for the  [https://moodle.org/plugins/tinymce_recordrtc TinyMCE editor] as a plugin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example uses are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Introductions in Forum posts&lt;br /&gt;
*Spoken assignments instead of typed&lt;br /&gt;
*Quiz questions where the teacher speaks the question&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Types of audio (sound) files==&lt;br /&gt;
*Moodle&#039;s default [[VideoJS player]] will play the following audio files: mp3, .aac, .flac, .m4a, .oga, .ogg, .wav&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ways of displaying audio==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Linking to a sound file online elsewhere===&lt;br /&gt;
*If your audio file is hosted elsewhere online you can simply link to the relevant page by choosing [[URL]] from &#039;Add an activity or resource&#039; and pasting in the relevant link given you by the site.&lt;br /&gt;
*Note that, in an establishment where certain sharing sites might be banned, your students might not be able to access your sound file through Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Uploading audio ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If your browser allows resources to be dragged and dropped, then you can turn on the editing and drag the audio file directly onto the course page.&lt;br /&gt;
*A box will then appear for you to decide whether you want the audio embedded in a label, or added as a clickable file resource:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:33dragdropmp3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Alternatively, you can upload the audio file by turning the editing on and choosing &#039;&#039;Add an activity or  resource&amp;gt;[[File|File]]&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Embedding a sound file in its own player===&lt;br /&gt;
*Moodle includes a built-in audio player. If the relevant [[Multimedia plugins filter]] is enabled by the administrator and within the course, sound files embedded into the text editor will play inline.&lt;br /&gt;
*Anywhere that Moodle&#039;s text editor is available, it is possible to embed a sound file, for example in a [[Label|label]] or a [[Page|page]], a course topic summary, a [[Description_question_type| quiz description]] or a [[Lesson|lesson]]. The next section explains how:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using the Moodle media icon====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*With your editing turned on, click into the HTML editor where you wish to embed your sound file. (It needs to be mp3.) &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Moodle media icon as in the following screenshot:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddMediaAtto.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*If your sound file is online, paste its URL in the Source URL box in the Link tab&lt;br /&gt;
*If you want to upload an audio file, click the Audio tab.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DocsVideoInsertMedia.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Browse repositories button to locate and upload your audio file from the repository where it is stored. (What you see depends on what the admin has enabled.) If you have it in more than one file type, then you can upload an alternative video by clicking &#039;Add alternative source&#039;. This helps make your sound file play on more browsers and devices.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced settings&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to decide how the file will play&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Subtitles and captions&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to add subtitle files (VTT) in different languages and/or caption files, with descriptions, chapters and metadata. Subtitles, captions, chapters and descriptions can be added to videos and audios using WebVTT file format. These files can be created using caption making software or just plain text editor. Find out more about WebVTT format here (https://w3c.github.io/webvtt/)&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Insert media button when you are ready.&lt;br /&gt;
*Your sound file will appear but not yet play:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddAudioAtto.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Once saved, your file will display in its own player:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NewSoundFilePlay.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using a hyperlink====&lt;br /&gt;
(Note - this method has no advantage over using the  media icon, but was popular in older versions of Moodle)&lt;br /&gt;
*With your editing turned on, click into the HTML editor where you wish to embed your mp3 file.&lt;br /&gt;
*Type some blank spaces and select them.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the hyperlink icon as in the following screenshot.(The icon will only be clickable if you have selected text or spaces)&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &amp;quot;Browse repositories&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
*This takes you to the file picker. Follow the instructions for uploading/selecting your sound file as for using the Moodle media icon.&lt;br /&gt;
*When your file is chosen, it will appear in the link URL box as below. Click &#039;&#039;Create link&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Don&#039;t panic!&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; You will now only get a blue line in the HTML editor:&lt;br /&gt;
*When you click &#039;&#039;save changes&#039;&#039; to return to the main course page, your mp3 file will display.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using embed code to display online audio====&lt;br /&gt;
*Some sites provide embed code/widgets that will enable you to play their mp3 files on your Moodle. First - go to your chosen site and copy this code of the mp3 file you wish to use.&lt;br /&gt;
*With your editing turned on, click into the HTML editor where you wish to embed the file.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the HTML code icon as in the following screenshot:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:hyperlinkicon.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Paste your embed code into the box:&lt;br /&gt;
*Scroll down and click &amp;quot;update&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*The mp3 file will be previewed in the HTML editor. Click &#039;&#039;save changes&#039;&#039; for it to display on the page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Media FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Speech tools]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Audio]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Language teaching]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Audio]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Audio]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Audio]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Audio&amp;diff=139658</id>
		<title>Audio</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Audio&amp;diff=139658"/>
		<updated>2021-02-10T10:39:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* Recording short audio messages */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Working with media}}&lt;br /&gt;
Audio is a very powerful tool to use in a Moodle course. Teachers and students can use audio actively, by recording short messages directly into the Atto editor. Teachers can also display audio so students can, for example to catch up on missed lectures, learn from podcasts, or improve their language skills by listening to native speakers interact. To use audio in Moodle to best effect,  the [[Multimedia plugins filter]] must be enabled. For hints on creating your own audio files, see the [https://docs.moodle.org/32/en/Advanced_Audio Advanced Audio] page.&lt;br /&gt;
==Recording short audio messages==&lt;br /&gt;
 [[File:recordrtcatto.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle&#039;s [[Atto editor]] allows teachers and students to record short audio messages by clicking the relevant icon.( If you don&#039;t see this setting in the Atto editor, ask your administrator to check the [[RecordRT]]C settings.) This feature is also available for the  [https://moodle.org/plugins/tinymce_recordrtc TinyMCE editor] as a plugin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example uses are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Introductions in Forum posts&lt;br /&gt;
*Spoken assignments instead of typed&lt;br /&gt;
*Quiz questions where the teacher speaks the question&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Types of audio (sound) files==&lt;br /&gt;
*Moodle&#039;s default [[VideoJS player]] will play the following audio files: mp3, .aac, .flac, .m4a, .oga, .ogg, .wav&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ways of displaying audio==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Linking to a sound file online elsewhere===&lt;br /&gt;
*If your audio file is hosted elsewhere online you can simply link to the relevant page by choosing [[URL]] from &#039;Add an activity or resource&#039; and pasting in the relevant link given you by the site.&lt;br /&gt;
*Note that, in an establishment where certain sharing sites might be banned, your students might not be able to access your sound file through Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Uploading audio ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If your browser allows resources to be dragged and dropped, then you can turn on the editing and drag the audio file directly onto the course page.&lt;br /&gt;
*A box will then appear for you to decide whether you want the audio embedded in a label, or added as a clickable file resource:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:33dragdropmp3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Alternatively, you can upload the audio file by turning the editing on and choosing &#039;&#039;Add an activity or  resource&amp;gt;[[File|File]]&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Embedding a sound file in its own player===&lt;br /&gt;
*Moodle includes a built-in audio player. If the relevant [[Multimedia plugins filter]] is enabled by the administrator and within the course, sound files embedded into the text editor will play inline.&lt;br /&gt;
*Anywhere that Moodle&#039;s text editor is available, it is possible to embed a sound file, for example in a [[Label|label]] or a [[Page|page]], a course topic summary, a [[Description_question_type| quiz description]] or a [[Lesson|lesson]]. The next section explains how:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using the Moodle media icon====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*With your editing turned on, click into the HTML editor where you wish to embed your sound file. (It needs to be mp3.) &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Moodle media icon as in the following screenshot:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddMediaAtto.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*If your sound file is online, paste its URL in the Source URL box in the Link tab&lt;br /&gt;
*If you want to upload an audio file, click the Audio tab.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DocsVideoInsertMedia.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Browse repositories button to locate and upload your audio file from the repository where it is stored. (What you see depends on what the admin has enabled.) If you have it in more than one file type, then you can upload an alternative video by clicking &#039;Add alternative source&#039;. This helps make your sound file play on more browsers and devices.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced settings&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to decide how the file will play&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Subtitles and captions&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to add subtitle files (VTT) in different languages and/or caption files, with descriptions, chapters and metadata. Subtitles, captions, chapters and descriptions can be added to videos and audios using WebVTT file format. These files can be created using caption making software or just plain text editor. Find out more about WebVTT format here (https://w3c.github.io/webvtt/)&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Insert media button when you are ready.&lt;br /&gt;
*Your sound file will appear but not yet play:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddAudioAtto.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Once saved, your file will display in its own player:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NewSoundFilePlay.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using a hyperlink====&lt;br /&gt;
(Note - this method has no advantage over using the  media icon, but was popular in older versions of Moodle)&lt;br /&gt;
*With your editing turned on, click into the HTML editor where you wish to embed your mp3 file.&lt;br /&gt;
*Type some blank spaces and select them.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the hyperlink icon as in the following screenshot.(The icon will only be clickable if you have selected text or spaces)&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &amp;quot;Browse repositories&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
*This takes you to the file picker. Follow the instructions for uploading/selecting your sound file as for using the Moodle media icon.&lt;br /&gt;
*When your file is chosen, it will appear in the link URL box as below. Click &#039;&#039;Create link&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Don&#039;t panic!&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; You will now only get a blue line in the HTML editor:&lt;br /&gt;
*When you click &#039;&#039;save changes&#039;&#039; to return to the main course page, your mp3 file will display.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using embed code to display online audio====&lt;br /&gt;
*Some sites provide embed code/widgets that will enable you to play their mp3 files on your Moodle. First - go to your chosen site and copy this code of the mp3 file you wish to use.&lt;br /&gt;
*With your editing turned on, click into the HTML editor where you wish to embed the file.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the HTML code icon as in the following screenshot:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:hyperlinkicon.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Paste your embed code into the box:&lt;br /&gt;
*Scroll down and click &amp;quot;update&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*The mp3 file will be previewed in the HTML editor. Click &#039;&#039;save changes&#039;&#039; for it to display on the page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Media FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Speech tools]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Audio]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Language teaching]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Audio]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Audio]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Audio]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Video&amp;diff=139657</id>
		<title>Video</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Video&amp;diff=139657"/>
		<updated>2021-02-10T10:39:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Working with media}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Video is a very powerful tool to use in a Moodle course. Teachers and students can use video actively, by recording short messages directly into the Atto editor. Teachers can also display video so students, for example,  catch up on lectures they missed, learn from a &amp;quot;how-to&amp;quot; screencast, or improve their language skills by watching native speakers interact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Recording short video messages==&lt;br /&gt;
 [[File:recordrtcatto.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle&#039;s [[Atto editor]] allows teachers and students to record short video messages by clicking the relevant icon.( If you don&#039;t see this setting in the Atto editor, ask your administrator to check the [[RecordRTC]] settings.) This feature is also available for the  [https://moodle.org/plugins/tinymce_recordrtc TinyMCE editor] as a plugin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example uses are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Introductions in Forum posts&lt;br /&gt;
*Spoken assignments instead of typed&lt;br /&gt;
*Courses where teachers and students interact by signing instead of speaking or typing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Where to host the videos==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you upload your videos to your Moodle site,  storing them on your own server, then you retain ultimate control. If you are worried about multiple copies of the same video taking up lots of space, then that is not a problem; the Moodle file system is clever enough to only store a single copy of a file, no matter how many times you upload it to your server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When server space or upload limits are restricted, or if you are seeking some video player features not available within Moodle, it is convenient to upload videos to an online site like [http://www.youtube.com YouTube] or [http://vimeo.com Vimeo]. They can easily be embedded inside Moodle from such sites and privacy can still be maintained if you choose their private video sharing option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ways of displaying video==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Linking to a video online elsewhere===&lt;br /&gt;
*If your video is hosted elsewhere online (such as YouTube or Vimeo) you can simply link to the relevant page by choosing [[URL]] from &#039;Add an activity or resource&#039; and pasting in the relevant link.&lt;br /&gt;
*Note that, in an establishment where certain video sharing sites might be banned, your students might not be able to access your video through Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Uploading a video===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If your browser allows resources to be dragged and dropped, then you can turn on the editing and drag the video directly onto the course page.&lt;br /&gt;
*A box will then appear for you to decide whether you want the video embedded in a label, or added as a clickable file resource.&lt;br /&gt;
*Alternatively, you can upload the video by turning the editing on and choosing &#039;&#039;Add an activity or  resource &amp;gt; [[File]]&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Embedding a video in its own player===&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle uses [[VideoJS player]] as its default player as it is responsive and displays video well across devices and browsers. With the [[Multimedia plugins filter]] enabled, videos may be embedded as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using the Moodle media icon====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;(Note that these instructions are for the [[Atto editor]])&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*With your editing turned on, click into the Atto editor text box where you wish to embed your video. &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Moodle media icon as in the following screenshot:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddMediaAtto.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*If your video is online, paste its URL into the Source URL box.&lt;br /&gt;
*If your video is one you want to upload, click the Video tab.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DocsVideoInsertMedia.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Browse repositories button to locate and upload your video from the repository where it is stored. (What you see depends on what the admin has enabled.) If you have it in more than one file type (such as .mov and .mp4) then you can upload an alternative video by clicking &#039;Add alternative source&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Display options&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to specify a height and width for the video&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced settings&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to decide how the video will play&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Subtitles and captions&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to add subtitle files (VTT) in different languages and/or caption files, with descriptions, chapters, and metadata. Subtitles, captions, chapters, and descriptions can be added to videos and audios using the [https://w3c.github.io/webvtt/ WebVTT file format]. These files can be created using caption making software or just a plain text editor. If the video is on YouTube, subtitles can be generated automatically then corrected. Software such as Camtasia enables subtitles to be easily added. &#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;The files must be uploaded to Moodle; they will not display if they are linked from elsewhere.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Insert media button when you are ready.&lt;br /&gt;
*Your video will appear a blue link until you save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DocsVideoVideoJS.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using a hyperlink====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;(Note: this method has no advantage over using the media icon.)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*With your editing turned on, click into the Atto editor where you wish to embed your video.&lt;br /&gt;
*Type some blank spaces (or some text) and select them.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the hyperlink icon. (The icon will only be clickable if you have selected text or spaces.)&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;Browse repositories&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*This takes you to the file picker. Follow the instructions for uploading/selecting your video as for using the Moodle media icon.&lt;br /&gt;
*When your video is chosen, it will appear in the link URL box as below. Click &#039;&#039;Insert:&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Don&#039;t panic!&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; You will now only get a blue line (if you selected blank spaces) or the actual text underlined in the Atto  editor:&lt;br /&gt;
*When you click &#039;&#039;save changes&#039;&#039; to return to the main course page, your video will display.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using embed code to display external videos====&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to your chosen video sharing site and find the embed code of the video you wish to display. Copy this code.&lt;br /&gt;
*With your editing turned on, click into the Atto editor where you wish to embed your video.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the HTML code icon as in the following screenshot:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:hyperlinkicon.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Paste your embed code into the box:&lt;br /&gt;
*Save your changes&lt;br /&gt;
*Your video will display embedded in a player. Youtube videos by default play via the [[VideoJS player]].&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VideoJSOfficialMusicVideo.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Media FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Multimedia plugins filter]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/plugins/mod_jitsi Jitsi] - This module allows creating jitsi-meet videoconference sessions&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/plugins/mod_bigbluebuttonbn Big Blue Button] - Integrate BigBlueButton within Moodle - including record and playback of sessions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=143478 Best video format]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=344662 download h5p interactive video in moodle]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=386059#p1556113 Workshop Module enhances American Sign Language classroom with Video Recordings]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Language teaching]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Video]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Video]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=RecordRTC&amp;diff=139656</id>
		<title>RecordRTC</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=RecordRTC&amp;diff=139656"/>
		<updated>2021-02-10T10:38:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* What is RecordRTC? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox plugin&lt;br /&gt;
|type = Editors&lt;br /&gt;
|entry = https://moodle.org/plugins/tinymce_recordrtc&lt;br /&gt;
|maintainer = [[User:Jesus Federico|Jesus Federico]]&lt;br /&gt;
|float = right&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
==What is RecordRTC?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RecordRTC is a standard feature in the [[Atto editor]] , enabling users to add audio and video annotations to text, anywhere a text editor is present. This plugin adds buttons for recording audio or video (with audio) to the editor&#039;s toolbar. [[File:recordrtcatto.png]] RecordRTC is available as a plugin for the  [https://moodle.org/plugins/tinymce_recordrtc TinyMCE editor],&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using [https://webrtc.org/ WebRTC] technologies, all recording is done instantly in the browser. After recording, users can embed the annotation directly into the text they are currently editing. The recording will appear as an audio or video player in the published writing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The plugin works fine with Chrome, Firefox and Opera on Desktop computers running Windows, Linux, Mac OS and Chrome OS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I get it?==&lt;br /&gt;
For the default Atto editor this functionality is included, no additional installation is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the TinyMCE editor:&lt;br /&gt;
*Administrators whose Moodle sites allow plugins to be installed directly can install RecordRTC by clicking the Install Plugins link from the Plugins area of Site administration and then searching for the [https://moodle.org/plugins/tinymce_recordrtc  TinyMCE RecordRTC plugin].&lt;br /&gt;
*Administrators who are not able to install plugins directly can [https://moodle.org/plugins/tinymce_recordrtc download the plugin from the Moodle Plugins directory] and upload it to the server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[#How_do_I_set_it_up_with_Ubuntu.3F|the FAQ below for set up with Ubuntu]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== What are the admin settings? ===&lt;br /&gt;
The plugins will work with the defaults, but you can change them from theText editors pages (Atto or TinyMCE) from Plugins in Site administration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Administrators can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Allow the users to record only audio, only video, or both by changing the buttons that appear in the editor toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the target bitrate of recorded audio.&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the target bitrate of recorded video&lt;br /&gt;
* Set the recording time limit, to control maximum recording size&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default bitrate for recorded audio (128000) should lead to generate files of about 15kB per minute and the default bitrate for recorded video (2500000) to generate files of 20MB per minute. The lower the bitrate the smaller the file size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The recording time limit is set to 120 seconds by default so the maximum size expected on video files should be of about 40MB&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How does it work?==&lt;br /&gt;
*The Atto or TinyMCE editors will display one or both icons for audio and/or video, depending on the administrator&#039;s setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RecordAtto.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the icon for audio or video recording. You&#039;ll see a button &#039;Start recording&#039;. Click it and speak.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:attachasannotation.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*When you have finished, click to stop the recording. It will ask you to name it and attach the recording as an annotation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Troubleshooting ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Recording stops after a few seconds ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:recordingrtc_error_limit_reached.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two settings that establish the maximum file size that can be uploaded to Moodle. These are defined in php.ini for the web server.&lt;br /&gt;
 post_max_size = 8M&lt;br /&gt;
 upload_max_filesize = 2M&lt;br /&gt;
Just edit the file and increase their values to something between 40M-50M for 2 minutes video recordings. &lt;br /&gt;
In Ubuntu&lt;br /&gt;
 vi /etc/php/7.0/apache2/php.ini&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set some large values as described in [https://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-62872?focusedCommentId=654424&amp;amp;page=com.atlassian.jira.plugin.system.issuetabpanels%3Acomment-tabpanel#comment-654424 this Moodle tracker issue]:&lt;br /&gt;
 post_max_size = 1024M&lt;br /&gt;
 upload_max_filesize = 1024M &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Known Issues ==&lt;br /&gt;
* The media files don&#039;t show duration&lt;br /&gt;
* The controls for navigating the files do not work properly in the player.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== F.A.Q. ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Why won&#039;t these plugins work with all browsers? ===&lt;br /&gt;
WebRTC (&amp;quot;Web Real-Time Communication&amp;quot;) is a collection of communications protocols and application programming interfaces that enable real-time communication over peer-to-peer connections. Implemented in browsers it enables applications such as video conferencing, file transfer, chat, or desktop sharing without the need of either internal or external plugins.[[https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/WebRTC Wikipedia]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MediaStream Recording API, sometimes simply referred to as the Media Recording API or the MediaRecorder API, is closely affiliated with the Media Capture and Streams API and the WebRTC API. The MediaStream Recording API makes it easy to record audio and/or video streams. When used with navigator.mediaDevices.getUserMedia(), it provides an easy way to record from the user&#039;s input devices and instantly use the result in web apps. Both audio and video may be recorded, separately or together. [[https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/MediaRecorder MediaRecorder Documentation]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As these plugins make use of diverse WebRTC technologies, they can only be used in browsers that have implemented both [[https://www.w3.org/TR/webrtc/ WebRTC 1.0]] and [[https://www.w3.org/TR/mediastream-recording/ MediaRecorder API]]. This is the case for [https://www.google.com/chrome/ Chrome], [https://www.mozilla.org/en-US/firefox/new/ Firefox] and [http://www.opera.com/ Opera]. [[https://webrtc.org/  See `Supported browsers and platforms`]] Therefore these are the only ones that the initial version of these plugins (1.0) support.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edge has implemented WebRTC 1.0 in [https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/microsoft-edge Microsoft Edge] but it does not include MediaRecorder API, so implementing the plugins for this browser requires some customisation to the libraries and the use of an external server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Safari 11 for iOS will support WebRTC 1.0 [[https://webrtc.ventures/2017/06/webrtc-support-in-safari-11/ See]] but same as edge, the implementation of MediaRecorder API has not been announced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this covers only about the 60% of the browsers, there are plans for adding support to these two browsers by making use of Media Streaming as in version 2.0 of these plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Can I have recordings of more than 2 minutes? ===&lt;br /&gt;
Yes. That can be changed in the plugin configuration. Keep in mind that as the file size will increase, the settings in php should also be edited.&lt;br /&gt;
Also, because the size can be too much for the browser itself, we recommend not going to large.&lt;br /&gt;
The only solution for giving a really large limit to the file size is to include a server component for doing a progressive upload and trans coding. But the first version of these plugins do not cover that possibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Where are the recordings stored? ===&lt;br /&gt;
Storing the RecordRTC recordings is not different than storing any other media file that is uploaded to Moodle. So, it depends of the file system your Moodle server has configured.&lt;br /&gt;
When using the default configuration, all files are stored in &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;/moodlepath/moodledata/filedir/xx/yy/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; where xx and yy are the path defined by the API when the file was uploaded.&lt;br /&gt;
If you are a developer interested in learning more details about this you can see [https://docs.moodle.org/dev/File_API_internals#File_storage_on_disk File storage on disk]. It is an old article but it gives a good idea on what is underneath. Also see [[Amazon S3 repository]] for information on storing files externally in Amazon S3 buckets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How do I set it up with Ubuntu?===&lt;br /&gt;
* Navigate to `moodle_root_path/lib/editor/atto/plugins` or `moodle_root_path/lib/editor/tinymce/plugins`, where `moodle_root_path` is the location where Moodle is installed (ex.: `/var/www/html/moodle`)&lt;br /&gt;
** For Atto execute &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo git clone https://github.com/blindsidenetworks/moodle-atto_recordrtc.git recordrtc&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
** For TinyMCE execute &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo git clone https://github.com/blindsidenetworks/moodle-tinymce_recordrtc.git recordrtc&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Log into a Moodle account with administration capabilities&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Notes for system administrators ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Increasing max file size ===&lt;br /&gt;
The default maximum size of uploads in PHP is very small, it is recommended to set the upload_max_filesize setting to 40M and the post_max_size setting to 50M for a time limit of 2:00 to avoid getting an alert while recording.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The file size of recorded video for Firefox will likely be twice that of other browsers, even with the same settings; this is expected as it uses a different writing library for recording video. The audio file size should be similar across all browsers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Notes for developers ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Updating libraries ===&lt;br /&gt;
These plugins makes use of two libraries. Adapter.js which makes all the WebRTC magic and Bowser.js that helps to identify the browser and OS where the application is running.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If trying to update Bowser or Adapter.js dependencies for the project, it is necessary to replace the named definition at the top of the file with an anonymous one, like so &lt;br /&gt;
For Bowser.js:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Old code:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
!function (root, name, definition) {&lt;br /&gt;
if (typeof module != &#039;undefined&#039; &amp;amp;&amp;amp; module.exports) module.exports = definition()&lt;br /&gt;
else if (typeof define == &#039;function&#039; &amp;amp;&amp;amp; define.amd) define(name, definition)&lt;br /&gt;
else root[name] = definition()&lt;br /&gt;
}(this, &#039;bowser&#039;, function () {&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New code:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
define([], function() {&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Or so for Adapter.js:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Old code&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(function(f){if(typeof exports===&amp;quot;object&amp;quot;&amp;amp;&amp;amp;typeof module!==&amp;quot;undefined&amp;quot;){module.exports=f()}else if(typeof define===&amp;quot;function&amp;quot;&amp;amp;&amp;amp;define.amd){define([],f)}else{var g;if(typeof window!==&amp;quot;undefined&amp;quot;){g=window}else if(typeof global!==&amp;quot;undefined&amp;quot;){g=global}else if(typeof self!==&amp;quot;undefined&amp;quot;){g=self}else{g=this}g.adapter = f()}})(function(){&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New code&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
define([], function() {&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Audio]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Video]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Language teaching]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:RecordRTC]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=RecordRTC&amp;diff=139655</id>
		<title>RecordRTC</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=RecordRTC&amp;diff=139655"/>
		<updated>2021-02-10T10:38:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: clarifying&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox plugin&lt;br /&gt;
|type = Editors&lt;br /&gt;
|entry = https://moodle.org/plugins/tinymce_recordrtc&lt;br /&gt;
|maintainer = [[User:Jesus Federico|Jesus Federico]]&lt;br /&gt;
|float = right&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
==What is RecordRTC?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RecordRTC is a standard feature in the [[Atto editor]] , enabling users to add audio and video annotations to text, anywhere a text editor is present. This plugin adds buttons for recording audio or video (with audio) to the editor&#039;s toolbar. [[File:recordrtc_buttons.png]] RecordRTC is available as a plugin for the  [https://moodle.org/plugins/tinymce_recordrtc TinyMCE editor],&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using [https://webrtc.org/ WebRTC] technologies, all recording is done instantly in the browser. After recording, users can embed the annotation directly into the text they are currently editing. The recording will appear as an audio or video player in the published writing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The plugin works fine with Chrome, Firefox and Opera on Desktop computers running Windows, Linux, Mac OS and Chrome OS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I get it?==&lt;br /&gt;
For the default Atto editor this functionality is included, no additional installation is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the TinyMCE editor:&lt;br /&gt;
*Administrators whose Moodle sites allow plugins to be installed directly can install RecordRTC by clicking the Install Plugins link from the Plugins area of Site administration and then searching for the [https://moodle.org/plugins/tinymce_recordrtc  TinyMCE RecordRTC plugin].&lt;br /&gt;
*Administrators who are not able to install plugins directly can [https://moodle.org/plugins/tinymce_recordrtc download the plugin from the Moodle Plugins directory] and upload it to the server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[#How_do_I_set_it_up_with_Ubuntu.3F|the FAQ below for set up with Ubuntu]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== What are the admin settings? ===&lt;br /&gt;
The plugins will work with the defaults, but you can change them from theText editors pages (Atto or TinyMCE) from Plugins in Site administration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Administrators can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Allow the users to record only audio, only video, or both by changing the buttons that appear in the editor toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the target bitrate of recorded audio.&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the target bitrate of recorded video&lt;br /&gt;
* Set the recording time limit, to control maximum recording size&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default bitrate for recorded audio (128000) should lead to generate files of about 15kB per minute and the default bitrate for recorded video (2500000) to generate files of 20MB per minute. The lower the bitrate the smaller the file size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The recording time limit is set to 120 seconds by default so the maximum size expected on video files should be of about 40MB&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How does it work?==&lt;br /&gt;
*The Atto or TinyMCE editors will display one or both icons for audio and/or video, depending on the administrator&#039;s setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RecordAtto.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the icon for audio or video recording. You&#039;ll see a button &#039;Start recording&#039;. Click it and speak.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:attachasannotation.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*When you have finished, click to stop the recording. It will ask you to name it and attach the recording as an annotation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Troubleshooting ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Recording stops after a few seconds ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:recordingrtc_error_limit_reached.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two settings that establish the maximum file size that can be uploaded to Moodle. These are defined in php.ini for the web server.&lt;br /&gt;
 post_max_size = 8M&lt;br /&gt;
 upload_max_filesize = 2M&lt;br /&gt;
Just edit the file and increase their values to something between 40M-50M for 2 minutes video recordings. &lt;br /&gt;
In Ubuntu&lt;br /&gt;
 vi /etc/php/7.0/apache2/php.ini&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set some large values as described in [https://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-62872?focusedCommentId=654424&amp;amp;page=com.atlassian.jira.plugin.system.issuetabpanels%3Acomment-tabpanel#comment-654424 this Moodle tracker issue]:&lt;br /&gt;
 post_max_size = 1024M&lt;br /&gt;
 upload_max_filesize = 1024M &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Known Issues ==&lt;br /&gt;
* The media files don&#039;t show duration&lt;br /&gt;
* The controls for navigating the files do not work properly in the player.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== F.A.Q. ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Why won&#039;t these plugins work with all browsers? ===&lt;br /&gt;
WebRTC (&amp;quot;Web Real-Time Communication&amp;quot;) is a collection of communications protocols and application programming interfaces that enable real-time communication over peer-to-peer connections. Implemented in browsers it enables applications such as video conferencing, file transfer, chat, or desktop sharing without the need of either internal or external plugins.[[https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/WebRTC Wikipedia]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MediaStream Recording API, sometimes simply referred to as the Media Recording API or the MediaRecorder API, is closely affiliated with the Media Capture and Streams API and the WebRTC API. The MediaStream Recording API makes it easy to record audio and/or video streams. When used with navigator.mediaDevices.getUserMedia(), it provides an easy way to record from the user&#039;s input devices and instantly use the result in web apps. Both audio and video may be recorded, separately or together. [[https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/MediaRecorder MediaRecorder Documentation]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As these plugins make use of diverse WebRTC technologies, they can only be used in browsers that have implemented both [[https://www.w3.org/TR/webrtc/ WebRTC 1.0]] and [[https://www.w3.org/TR/mediastream-recording/ MediaRecorder API]]. This is the case for [https://www.google.com/chrome/ Chrome], [https://www.mozilla.org/en-US/firefox/new/ Firefox] and [http://www.opera.com/ Opera]. [[https://webrtc.org/  See `Supported browsers and platforms`]] Therefore these are the only ones that the initial version of these plugins (1.0) support.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edge has implemented WebRTC 1.0 in [https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/microsoft-edge Microsoft Edge] but it does not include MediaRecorder API, so implementing the plugins for this browser requires some customisation to the libraries and the use of an external server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Safari 11 for iOS will support WebRTC 1.0 [[https://webrtc.ventures/2017/06/webrtc-support-in-safari-11/ See]] but same as edge, the implementation of MediaRecorder API has not been announced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this covers only about the 60% of the browsers, there are plans for adding support to these two browsers by making use of Media Streaming as in version 2.0 of these plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Can I have recordings of more than 2 minutes? ===&lt;br /&gt;
Yes. That can be changed in the plugin configuration. Keep in mind that as the file size will increase, the settings in php should also be edited.&lt;br /&gt;
Also, because the size can be too much for the browser itself, we recommend not going to large.&lt;br /&gt;
The only solution for giving a really large limit to the file size is to include a server component for doing a progressive upload and trans coding. But the first version of these plugins do not cover that possibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Where are the recordings stored? ===&lt;br /&gt;
Storing the RecordRTC recordings is not different than storing any other media file that is uploaded to Moodle. So, it depends of the file system your Moodle server has configured.&lt;br /&gt;
When using the default configuration, all files are stored in &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;/moodlepath/moodledata/filedir/xx/yy/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; where xx and yy are the path defined by the API when the file was uploaded.&lt;br /&gt;
If you are a developer interested in learning more details about this you can see [https://docs.moodle.org/dev/File_API_internals#File_storage_on_disk File storage on disk]. It is an old article but it gives a good idea on what is underneath. Also see [[Amazon S3 repository]] for information on storing files externally in Amazon S3 buckets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How do I set it up with Ubuntu?===&lt;br /&gt;
* Navigate to `moodle_root_path/lib/editor/atto/plugins` or `moodle_root_path/lib/editor/tinymce/plugins`, where `moodle_root_path` is the location where Moodle is installed (ex.: `/var/www/html/moodle`)&lt;br /&gt;
** For Atto execute &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo git clone https://github.com/blindsidenetworks/moodle-atto_recordrtc.git recordrtc&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
** For TinyMCE execute &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo git clone https://github.com/blindsidenetworks/moodle-tinymce_recordrtc.git recordrtc&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Log into a Moodle account with administration capabilities&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Notes for system administrators ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Increasing max file size ===&lt;br /&gt;
The default maximum size of uploads in PHP is very small, it is recommended to set the upload_max_filesize setting to 40M and the post_max_size setting to 50M for a time limit of 2:00 to avoid getting an alert while recording.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The file size of recorded video for Firefox will likely be twice that of other browsers, even with the same settings; this is expected as it uses a different writing library for recording video. The audio file size should be similar across all browsers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Notes for developers ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Updating libraries ===&lt;br /&gt;
These plugins makes use of two libraries. Adapter.js which makes all the WebRTC magic and Bowser.js that helps to identify the browser and OS where the application is running.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If trying to update Bowser or Adapter.js dependencies for the project, it is necessary to replace the named definition at the top of the file with an anonymous one, like so &lt;br /&gt;
For Bowser.js:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Old code:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
!function (root, name, definition) {&lt;br /&gt;
if (typeof module != &#039;undefined&#039; &amp;amp;&amp;amp; module.exports) module.exports = definition()&lt;br /&gt;
else if (typeof define == &#039;function&#039; &amp;amp;&amp;amp; define.amd) define(name, definition)&lt;br /&gt;
else root[name] = definition()&lt;br /&gt;
}(this, &#039;bowser&#039;, function () {&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New code:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
define([], function() {&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Or so for Adapter.js:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Old code&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(function(f){if(typeof exports===&amp;quot;object&amp;quot;&amp;amp;&amp;amp;typeof module!==&amp;quot;undefined&amp;quot;){module.exports=f()}else if(typeof define===&amp;quot;function&amp;quot;&amp;amp;&amp;amp;define.amd){define([],f)}else{var g;if(typeof window!==&amp;quot;undefined&amp;quot;){g=window}else if(typeof global!==&amp;quot;undefined&amp;quot;){g=global}else if(typeof self!==&amp;quot;undefined&amp;quot;){g=self}else{g=this}g.adapter = f()}})(function(){&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New code&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
define([], function() {&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Audio]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Video]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Language teaching]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:RecordRTC]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Audio&amp;diff=139654</id>
		<title>Audio</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Audio&amp;diff=139654"/>
		<updated>2021-02-10T10:32:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: updating&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Working with media}}&lt;br /&gt;
Audio is a very powerful tool to use in a Moodle course. Teachers and students can use audio actively, by recording short messages directly into the Atto editor. Teachers can also display audio so students can, for example to catch up on missed lectures, learn from podcasts, or improve their language skills by listening to native speakers interact. To use audio in Moodle to best effect,  the [[Multimedia plugins filter]] must be enabled. For hints on creating your own audio files, see the [https://docs.moodle.org/32/en/Advanced_Audio Advanced Audio] page.&lt;br /&gt;
==Recording short audio messages==&lt;br /&gt;
 [[File:recordrtcatto.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle&#039;s [[Atto editor]] allows teachers and students to record short audio messages by clicking the relevant icon.( If you don&#039;t see this setting in the Atto editor, ask your administrator to check the RecordRTC settings in site administration.) This feature is also available for the  [https://moodle.org/plugins/tinymce_recordrtc TinyMCE editor] as a plugin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example uses are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Introductions in Forum posts&lt;br /&gt;
*Spoken assignments instead of typed&lt;br /&gt;
*Quiz questions where the teacher speaks the question&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Types of audio (sound) files==&lt;br /&gt;
*Moodle&#039;s default [[VideoJS player]] will play the following audio files: mp3, .aac, .flac, .m4a, .oga, .ogg, .wav&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ways of displaying audio==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Linking to a sound file online elsewhere===&lt;br /&gt;
*If your audio file is hosted elsewhere online you can simply link to the relevant page by choosing [[URL]] from &#039;Add an activity or resource&#039; and pasting in the relevant link given you by the site.&lt;br /&gt;
*Note that, in an establishment where certain sharing sites might be banned, your students might not be able to access your sound file through Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Uploading audio ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If your browser allows resources to be dragged and dropped, then you can turn on the editing and drag the audio file directly onto the course page.&lt;br /&gt;
*A box will then appear for you to decide whether you want the audio embedded in a label, or added as a clickable file resource:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:33dragdropmp3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Alternatively, you can upload the audio file by turning the editing on and choosing &#039;&#039;Add an activity or  resource&amp;gt;[[File|File]]&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Embedding a sound file in its own player===&lt;br /&gt;
*Moodle includes a built-in audio player. If the relevant [[Multimedia plugins filter]] is enabled by the administrator and within the course, sound files embedded into the text editor will play inline.&lt;br /&gt;
*Anywhere that Moodle&#039;s text editor is available, it is possible to embed a sound file, for example in a [[Label|label]] or a [[Page|page]], a course topic summary, a [[Description_question_type| quiz description]] or a [[Lesson|lesson]]. The next section explains how:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using the Moodle media icon====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*With your editing turned on, click into the HTML editor where you wish to embed your sound file. (It needs to be mp3.) &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Moodle media icon as in the following screenshot:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddMediaAtto.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*If your sound file is online, paste its URL in the Source URL box in the Link tab&lt;br /&gt;
*If you want to upload an audio file, click the Audio tab.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DocsVideoInsertMedia.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Browse repositories button to locate and upload your audio file from the repository where it is stored. (What you see depends on what the admin has enabled.) If you have it in more than one file type, then you can upload an alternative video by clicking &#039;Add alternative source&#039;. This helps make your sound file play on more browsers and devices.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced settings&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to decide how the file will play&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Subtitles and captions&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to add subtitle files (VTT) in different languages and/or caption files, with descriptions, chapters and metadata. Subtitles, captions, chapters and descriptions can be added to videos and audios using WebVTT file format. These files can be created using caption making software or just plain text editor. Find out more about WebVTT format here (https://w3c.github.io/webvtt/)&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Insert media button when you are ready.&lt;br /&gt;
*Your sound file will appear but not yet play:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddAudioAtto.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Once saved, your file will display in its own player:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NewSoundFilePlay.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using a hyperlink====&lt;br /&gt;
(Note - this method has no advantage over using the  media icon, but was popular in older versions of Moodle)&lt;br /&gt;
*With your editing turned on, click into the HTML editor where you wish to embed your mp3 file.&lt;br /&gt;
*Type some blank spaces and select them.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the hyperlink icon as in the following screenshot.(The icon will only be clickable if you have selected text or spaces)&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &amp;quot;Browse repositories&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
*This takes you to the file picker. Follow the instructions for uploading/selecting your sound file as for using the Moodle media icon.&lt;br /&gt;
*When your file is chosen, it will appear in the link URL box as below. Click &#039;&#039;Create link&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Don&#039;t panic!&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; You will now only get a blue line in the HTML editor:&lt;br /&gt;
*When you click &#039;&#039;save changes&#039;&#039; to return to the main course page, your mp3 file will display.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using embed code to display online audio====&lt;br /&gt;
*Some sites provide embed code/widgets that will enable you to play their mp3 files on your Moodle. First - go to your chosen site and copy this code of the mp3 file you wish to use.&lt;br /&gt;
*With your editing turned on, click into the HTML editor where you wish to embed the file.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the HTML code icon as in the following screenshot:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:hyperlinkicon.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Paste your embed code into the box:&lt;br /&gt;
*Scroll down and click &amp;quot;update&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*The mp3 file will be previewed in the HTML editor. Click &#039;&#039;save changes&#039;&#039; for it to display on the page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Media FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Speech tools]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Audio]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Language teaching]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Audio]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Audio]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Audio]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=File:recordrtcatto.png&amp;diff=139653</id>
		<title>File:recordrtcatto.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=File:recordrtcatto.png&amp;diff=139653"/>
		<updated>2021-02-10T10:29:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Audio&amp;diff=139652</id>
		<title>Audio</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Audio&amp;diff=139652"/>
		<updated>2021-02-10T10:19:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* Using embed code to display online audio */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Working with media}}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039; This page covers  audio (sound files) which are added to a course by the teacher for students to listen to. See &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Speech tools |Speech tools]]&#039;&#039;&#039; if you are looking for ways to allow your students or teachers to record directly into Moodle or engage in audio conferencing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Audio is a very powerful tool to use in a Moodle course, allowing students, for example to catch up on lectures they missed, learn from podcasts, or improve their language skills by listening to native speakers interact. To use audio in Moodle to best effect,  the [[Multimedia plugins filter]] must be enabled. For hints on creating your own audio files, see the [https://docs.moodle.org/32/en/Advanced_Audio Advanced Audio] page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Types of audio (sound) files==&lt;br /&gt;
*Moodle&#039;s default [[VideoJS player]] will play the following audio files: mp3, .aac, .flac, .m4a, .oga, .ogg, .wav&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ways of displaying audio==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Linking to a sound file online elsewhere===&lt;br /&gt;
*If your audio file is hosted elsewhere online you can simply link to the relevant page by choosing [[URL]] from &#039;Add an activity or resource&#039; and pasting in the relevant link given you by the site.&lt;br /&gt;
*Note that, in an establishment where certain sharing sites might be banned, your students might not be able to access your sound file through Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Uploading audio ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If your browser allows resources to be dragged and dropped, then you can turn on the editing and drag the audio file directly onto the course page.&lt;br /&gt;
*A box will then appear for you to decide whether you want the audio embedded in a label, or added as a clickable file resource:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:33dragdropmp3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Alternatively, you can upload the audio file by turning the editing on and choosing &#039;&#039;Add an activity or  resource&amp;gt;[[File|File]]&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Embedding a sound file in its own player===&lt;br /&gt;
*Moodle includes a built-in audio player. If the relevant [[Multimedia plugins filter]] is enabled by the administrator and within the course, sound files embedded into the text editor will play inline.&lt;br /&gt;
*Anywhere that Moodle&#039;s text editor is available, it is possible to embed a sound file, for example in a [[Label|label]] or a [[Page|page]], a course topic summary, a [[Description_question_type| quiz description]] or a [[Lesson|lesson]]. The next section explains how:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using the Moodle media icon====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*With your editing turned on, click into the HTML editor where you wish to embed your sound file. (It needs to be mp3.) &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Moodle media icon as in the following screenshot:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddMediaAtto.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*If your sound file is online, paste its URL in the Source URL box in the Link tab&lt;br /&gt;
*If you want to upload an audio file, click the Audio tab.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DocsVideoInsertMedia.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Browse repositories button to locate and upload your audio file from the repository where it is stored. (What you see depends on what the admin has enabled.) If you have it in more than one file type, then you can upload an alternative video by clicking &#039;Add alternative source&#039;. This helps make your sound file play on more browsers and devices.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced settings&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to decide how the file will play&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Subtitles and captions&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to add subtitle files (VTT) in different languages and/or caption files, with descriptions, chapters and metadata. Subtitles, captions, chapters and descriptions can be added to videos and audios using WebVTT file format. These files can be created using caption making software or just plain text editor. Find out more about WebVTT format here (https://w3c.github.io/webvtt/)&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Insert media button when you are ready.&lt;br /&gt;
*Your sound file will appear but not yet play:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddAudioAtto.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Once saved, your file will display in its own player:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NewSoundFilePlay.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using a hyperlink====&lt;br /&gt;
(Note - this method has no advantage over using the  media icon, but was popular in older versions of Moodle)&lt;br /&gt;
*With your editing turned on, click into the HTML editor where you wish to embed your mp3 file.&lt;br /&gt;
*Type some blank spaces and select them.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the hyperlink icon as in the following screenshot.(The icon will only be clickable if you have selected text or spaces)&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &amp;quot;Browse repositories&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
*This takes you to the file picker. Follow the instructions for uploading/selecting your sound file as for using the Moodle media icon.&lt;br /&gt;
*When your file is chosen, it will appear in the link URL box as below. Click &#039;&#039;Create link&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Don&#039;t panic!&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; You will now only get a blue line in the HTML editor:&lt;br /&gt;
*When you click &#039;&#039;save changes&#039;&#039; to return to the main course page, your mp3 file will display.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using embed code to display online audio====&lt;br /&gt;
*Some sites provide embed code/widgets that will enable you to play their mp3 files on your Moodle. First - go to your chosen site and copy this code of the mp3 file you wish to use.&lt;br /&gt;
*With your editing turned on, click into the HTML editor where you wish to embed the file.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the HTML code icon as in the following screenshot:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:hyperlinkicon.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Paste your embed code into the box:&lt;br /&gt;
*Scroll down and click &amp;quot;update&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*The mp3 file will be previewed in the HTML editor. Click &#039;&#039;save changes&#039;&#039; for it to display on the page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====RecordRTC====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[RecordRTC]] is a set of plugins for the [https://moodle.org/plugins/atto_recordrtc Atto editor] and [https://moodle.org/plugins/tinymce_recordrtc TinyMCE editor], enabling users to add audio and video annotations to text, anywhere a text editor is present. This plugin adds buttons for recording audio or video (with audio) to the editor&#039;s toolbar. [[File:recordrtc_buttons.png]]. See [[RecordRTC]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Media FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Speech tools]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Audio]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Language teaching]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Audio]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Audio]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Audio]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Audio&amp;diff=139651</id>
		<title>Audio</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Audio&amp;diff=139651"/>
		<updated>2021-02-10T10:18:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: removing out of date screenshots&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Working with media}}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039; This page covers  audio (sound files) which are added to a course by the teacher for students to listen to. See &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Speech tools |Speech tools]]&#039;&#039;&#039; if you are looking for ways to allow your students or teachers to record directly into Moodle or engage in audio conferencing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Audio is a very powerful tool to use in a Moodle course, allowing students, for example to catch up on lectures they missed, learn from podcasts, or improve their language skills by listening to native speakers interact. To use audio in Moodle to best effect,  the [[Multimedia plugins filter]] must be enabled. For hints on creating your own audio files, see the [https://docs.moodle.org/32/en/Advanced_Audio Advanced Audio] page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Types of audio (sound) files==&lt;br /&gt;
*Moodle&#039;s default [[VideoJS player]] will play the following audio files: mp3, .aac, .flac, .m4a, .oga, .ogg, .wav&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ways of displaying audio==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Linking to a sound file online elsewhere===&lt;br /&gt;
*If your audio file is hosted elsewhere online you can simply link to the relevant page by choosing [[URL]] from &#039;Add an activity or resource&#039; and pasting in the relevant link given you by the site.&lt;br /&gt;
*Note that, in an establishment where certain sharing sites might be banned, your students might not be able to access your sound file through Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Uploading audio ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If your browser allows resources to be dragged and dropped, then you can turn on the editing and drag the audio file directly onto the course page.&lt;br /&gt;
*A box will then appear for you to decide whether you want the audio embedded in a label, or added as a clickable file resource:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:33dragdropmp3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Alternatively, you can upload the audio file by turning the editing on and choosing &#039;&#039;Add an activity or  resource&amp;gt;[[File|File]]&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Embedding a sound file in its own player===&lt;br /&gt;
*Moodle includes a built-in audio player. If the relevant [[Multimedia plugins filter]] is enabled by the administrator and within the course, sound files embedded into the text editor will play inline.&lt;br /&gt;
*Anywhere that Moodle&#039;s text editor is available, it is possible to embed a sound file, for example in a [[Label|label]] or a [[Page|page]], a course topic summary, a [[Description_question_type| quiz description]] or a [[Lesson|lesson]]. The next section explains how:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using the Moodle media icon====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*With your editing turned on, click into the HTML editor where you wish to embed your sound file. (It needs to be mp3.) &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Moodle media icon as in the following screenshot:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddMediaAtto.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*If your sound file is online, paste its URL in the Source URL box in the Link tab&lt;br /&gt;
*If you want to upload an audio file, click the Audio tab.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DocsVideoInsertMedia.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Browse repositories button to locate and upload your audio file from the repository where it is stored. (What you see depends on what the admin has enabled.) If you have it in more than one file type, then you can upload an alternative video by clicking &#039;Add alternative source&#039;. This helps make your sound file play on more browsers and devices.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced settings&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to decide how the file will play&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Subtitles and captions&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to add subtitle files (VTT) in different languages and/or caption files, with descriptions, chapters and metadata. Subtitles, captions, chapters and descriptions can be added to videos and audios using WebVTT file format. These files can be created using caption making software or just plain text editor. Find out more about WebVTT format here (https://w3c.github.io/webvtt/)&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Insert media button when you are ready.&lt;br /&gt;
*Your sound file will appear but not yet play:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddAudioAtto.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Once saved, your file will display in its own player:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NewSoundFilePlay.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using a hyperlink====&lt;br /&gt;
(Note - this method has no advantage over using the  media icon, but was popular in older versions of Moodle)&lt;br /&gt;
*With your editing turned on, click into the HTML editor where you wish to embed your mp3 file.&lt;br /&gt;
*Type some blank spaces and select them.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the hyperlink icon as in the following screenshot.(The icon will only be clickable if you have selected text or spaces)&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &amp;quot;Browse repositories&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
*This takes you to the file picker. Follow the instructions for uploading/selecting your sound file as for using the Moodle media icon.&lt;br /&gt;
*When your file is chosen, it will appear in the link URL box as below. Click &#039;&#039;Create link&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Don&#039;t panic!&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; You will now only get a blue line in the HTML editor:&lt;br /&gt;
*When you click &#039;&#039;save changes&#039;&#039; to return to the main course page, your mp3 file will display.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using embed code to display online audio====&lt;br /&gt;
*Some sites provide embed code/widgets that will enable you to play their mp3 files on your Moodle. First - go to your chosen site and copy this code of the mp3 file you wish to use.&lt;br /&gt;
*With your editing turned on, click into the HTML editor where you wish to embed the file.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the HTML code icon as in the following screenshot:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttoEmbedCode.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Paste your embed code into the box:&lt;br /&gt;
*Scroll down and click &amp;quot;update&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*The mp3 file will be previewed in the HTML editor. Click &#039;&#039;save changes&#039;&#039; for it to display on the page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====RecordRTC====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[RecordRTC]] is a set of plugins for the [https://moodle.org/plugins/atto_recordrtc Atto editor] and [https://moodle.org/plugins/tinymce_recordrtc TinyMCE editor], enabling users to add audio and video annotations to text, anywhere a text editor is present. This plugin adds buttons for recording audio or video (with audio) to the editor&#039;s toolbar. [[File:recordrtc_buttons.png]]. See [[RecordRTC]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Media FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Speech tools]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Audio]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Language teaching]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Audio]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Audio]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Audio]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Audio&amp;diff=139650</id>
		<title>Audio</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Audio&amp;diff=139650"/>
		<updated>2021-02-10T10:17:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: updated image&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Working with media}}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039; This page covers  audio (sound files) which are added to a course by the teacher for students to listen to. See &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Speech tools |Speech tools]]&#039;&#039;&#039; if you are looking for ways to allow your students or teachers to record directly into Moodle or engage in audio conferencing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Audio is a very powerful tool to use in a Moodle course, allowing students, for example to catch up on lectures they missed, learn from podcasts, or improve their language skills by listening to native speakers interact. To use audio in Moodle to best effect,  the [[Multimedia plugins filter]] must be enabled. For hints on creating your own audio files, see the [https://docs.moodle.org/32/en/Advanced_Audio Advanced Audio] page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Types of audio (sound) files==&lt;br /&gt;
*Moodle&#039;s default [[VideoJS player]] will play the following audio files: mp3, .aac, .flac, .m4a, .oga, .ogg, .wav&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ways of displaying audio==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Linking to a sound file online elsewhere===&lt;br /&gt;
*If your audio file is hosted elsewhere online you can simply link to the relevant page by choosing [[URL]] from &#039;Add an activity or resource&#039; and pasting in the relevant link given you by the site.&lt;br /&gt;
*Note that, in an establishment where certain sharing sites might be banned, your students might not be able to access your sound file through Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Uploading audio ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If your browser allows resources to be dragged and dropped, then you can turn on the editing and drag the audio file directly onto the course page.&lt;br /&gt;
*A box will then appear for you to decide whether you want the audio embedded in a label, or added as a clickable file resource:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:33dragdropmp3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Alternatively, you can upload the audio file by turning the editing on and choosing &#039;&#039;Add an activity or  resource&amp;gt;[[File|File]]&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Embedding a sound file in its own player===&lt;br /&gt;
*Moodle includes a built-in audio player. If the relevant [[Multimedia plugins filter]] is enabled by the administrator and within the course, sound files embedded into the text editor will play inline.&lt;br /&gt;
*Anywhere that Moodle&#039;s text editor is available, it is possible to embed a sound file, for example in a [[Label|label]] or a [[Page|page]], a course topic summary, a [[Description_question_type| quiz description]] or a [[Lesson|lesson]]. The next section explains how:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using the Moodle media icon====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*With your editing turned on, click into the HTML editor where you wish to embed your sound file. (It needs to be mp3.) &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Moodle media icon as in the following screenshot:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddMediaAtto.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*If your sound file is online, paste its URL in the Source URL box in the Link tab&lt;br /&gt;
*If you want to upload an audio file, click the Audio tab.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DocsVideoInsertMedia.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Browse repositories button to locate and upload your audio file from the repository where it is stored. (What you see depends on what the admin has enabled.) If you have it in more than one file type, then you can upload an alternative video by clicking &#039;Add alternative source&#039;. This helps make your sound file play on more browsers and devices.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced settings&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to decide how the file will play&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Subtitles and captions&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to add subtitle files (VTT) in different languages and/or caption files, with descriptions, chapters and metadata. Subtitles, captions, chapters and descriptions can be added to videos and audios using WebVTT file format. These files can be created using caption making software or just plain text editor. Find out more about WebVTT format here (https://w3c.github.io/webvtt/)&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Insert media button when you are ready.&lt;br /&gt;
*Your sound file will appear but not yet play:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddAudioAtto.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Once saved, your file will display in its own player:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NewSoundFilePlay.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using a hyperlink====&lt;br /&gt;
(Note - this method has no advantage over using the  media icon, but was popular in older versions of Moodle)&lt;br /&gt;
*With your editing turned on, click into the HTML editor where you wish to embed your mp3 file.&lt;br /&gt;
*Type some blank spaces and select them.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the hyperlink icon as in the following screenshot.(The icon will only be clickable if you have selected text or spaces)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Hyperlinkicon.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &amp;quot;Browse repositories&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Linkurl.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*This takes you to the file picker. Follow the instructions for uploading/selecting your sound file as for using the Moodle media icon.&lt;br /&gt;
*When your file is chosen, it will appear in the link URL box as below. Click &#039;&#039;Create link&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Insertvideo.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Don&#039;t panic!&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; You will now only get a blue line in the HTML editor:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Audiopreview2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*When you click &#039;&#039;save changes&#039;&#039; to return to the main course page, your mp3 file will display.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using embed code to display online audio====&lt;br /&gt;
*Some sites provide embed code/widgets that will enable you to play their mp3 files on your Moodle. First - go to your chosen site and copy this code of the mp3 file you wish to use.&lt;br /&gt;
*With your editing turned on, click into the HTML editor where you wish to embed the file.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the HTML code icon as in the following screenshot:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttoEmbedCode.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Paste your embed code into the box:&lt;br /&gt;
*Scroll down and click &amp;quot;update&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*The mp3 file will be previewed in the HTML editor. Click &#039;&#039;save changes&#039;&#039; for it to display on the page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====RecordRTC====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[RecordRTC]] is a set of plugins for the [https://moodle.org/plugins/atto_recordrtc Atto editor] and [https://moodle.org/plugins/tinymce_recordrtc TinyMCE editor], enabling users to add audio and video annotations to text, anywhere a text editor is present. This plugin adds buttons for recording audio or video (with audio) to the editor&#039;s toolbar. [[File:recordrtc_buttons.png]]. See [[RecordRTC]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Media FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Speech tools]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Audio]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Language teaching]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Audio]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Audio]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Audio]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=File:AddAudioAtto.png&amp;diff=139649</id>
		<title>File:AddAudioAtto.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=File:AddAudioAtto.png&amp;diff=139649"/>
		<updated>2021-02-10T10:17:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Video&amp;diff=139648</id>
		<title>Video</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Video&amp;diff=139648"/>
		<updated>2021-02-10T10:14:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* Using embed code to display external videos */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Working with media}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Video is a very powerful tool to use in a Moodle course, allowing students, for example, to catch up on lectures they missed, learn from a &amp;quot;how-to&amp;quot; screencast, or improve their language skills by watching native speakers interact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Where to host the videos==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you upload your videos to your Moodle site,  storing them on your own server, then you retain ultimate control. If you are worried about multiple copies of the same video taking up lots of space, then that is not a problem; the Moodle file system is clever enough to only store a single copy of a file, no matter how many times you upload it to your server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When server space or upload limits are restricted, or if you are seeking some video player features not available within Moodle, it is convenient to upload videos to an online site like [http://www.youtube.com YouTube] or [http://vimeo.com Vimeo]. They can easily be embedded inside Moodle from such sites and privacy can still be maintained if you choose their private video sharing option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ways of displaying video==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Linking to a video online elsewhere===&lt;br /&gt;
*If your video is hosted elsewhere online (such as YouTube or Vimeo) you can simply link to the relevant page by choosing [[URL]] from &#039;Add an activity or resource&#039; and pasting in the relevant link.&lt;br /&gt;
*Note that, in an establishment where certain video sharing sites might be banned, your students might not be able to access your video through Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Uploading a video===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If your browser allows resources to be dragged and dropped, then you can turn on the editing and drag the video directly onto the course page.&lt;br /&gt;
*A box will then appear for you to decide whether you want the video embedded in a label, or added as a clickable file resource.&lt;br /&gt;
*Alternatively, you can upload the video by turning the editing on and choosing &#039;&#039;Add an activity or  resource &amp;gt; [[File]]&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Embedding a video in its own player===&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle uses [[VideoJS player]] as its default player as it is responsive and displays video well across devices and browsers. With the [[Multimedia plugins filter]] enabled, videos may be embedded as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using the Moodle media icon====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;(Note that these instructions are for the [[Atto editor]])&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*With your editing turned on, click into the Atto editor text box where you wish to embed your video. &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Moodle media icon as in the following screenshot:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddMediaAtto.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*If your video is online, paste its URL into the Source URL box.&lt;br /&gt;
*If your video is one you want to upload, click the Video tab.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DocsVideoInsertMedia.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Browse repositories button to locate and upload your video from the repository where it is stored. (What you see depends on what the admin has enabled.) If you have it in more than one file type (such as .mov and .mp4) then you can upload an alternative video by clicking &#039;Add alternative source&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Display options&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to specify a height and width for the video&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced settings&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to decide how the video will play&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Subtitles and captions&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to add subtitle files (VTT) in different languages and/or caption files, with descriptions, chapters, and metadata. Subtitles, captions, chapters, and descriptions can be added to videos and audios using the [https://w3c.github.io/webvtt/ WebVTT file format]. These files can be created using caption making software or just a plain text editor. If the video is on YouTube, subtitles can be generated automatically then corrected. Software such as Camtasia enables subtitles to be easily added. &#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;The files must be uploaded to Moodle; they will not display if they are linked from elsewhere.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Insert media button when you are ready.&lt;br /&gt;
*Your video will appear a blue link until you save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DocsVideoVideoJS.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using a hyperlink====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;(Note: this method has no advantage over using the media icon.)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*With your editing turned on, click into the Atto editor where you wish to embed your video.&lt;br /&gt;
*Type some blank spaces (or some text) and select them.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the hyperlink icon. (The icon will only be clickable if you have selected text or spaces.)&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;Browse repositories&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*This takes you to the file picker. Follow the instructions for uploading/selecting your video as for using the Moodle media icon.&lt;br /&gt;
*When your video is chosen, it will appear in the link URL box as below. Click &#039;&#039;Insert:&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Don&#039;t panic!&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; You will now only get a blue line (if you selected blank spaces) or the actual text underlined in the Atto  editor:&lt;br /&gt;
*When you click &#039;&#039;save changes&#039;&#039; to return to the main course page, your video will display.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using embed code to display external videos====&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to your chosen video sharing site and find the embed code of the video you wish to display. Copy this code.&lt;br /&gt;
*With your editing turned on, click into the Atto editor where you wish to embed your video.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the HTML code icon as in the following screenshot:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:hyperlinkicon.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Paste your embed code into the box:&lt;br /&gt;
*Save your changes&lt;br /&gt;
*Your video will display embedded in a player. Youtube videos by default play via the [[VideoJS player]].&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VideoJSOfficialMusicVideo.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Media FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Multimedia plugins filter]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/plugins/mod_jitsi Jitsi] - This module allows creating jitsi-meet videoconference sessions&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/plugins/mod_bigbluebuttonbn Big Blue Button] - Integrate BigBlueButton within Moodle - including record and playback of sessions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=143478 Best video format]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=344662 download h5p interactive video in moodle]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=386059#p1556113 Workshop Module enhances American Sign Language classroom with Video Recordings]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Language teaching]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Video]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Video]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=File:hyperlinkicon.png&amp;diff=139647</id>
		<title>File:hyperlinkicon.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=File:hyperlinkicon.png&amp;diff=139647"/>
		<updated>2021-02-10T10:13:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Video&amp;diff=139646</id>
		<title>Video</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Video&amp;diff=139646"/>
		<updated>2021-02-10T10:11:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: removing out of date screenshots&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Working with media}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Video is a very powerful tool to use in a Moodle course, allowing students, for example, to catch up on lectures they missed, learn from a &amp;quot;how-to&amp;quot; screencast, or improve their language skills by watching native speakers interact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Where to host the videos==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you upload your videos to your Moodle site,  storing them on your own server, then you retain ultimate control. If you are worried about multiple copies of the same video taking up lots of space, then that is not a problem; the Moodle file system is clever enough to only store a single copy of a file, no matter how many times you upload it to your server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When server space or upload limits are restricted, or if you are seeking some video player features not available within Moodle, it is convenient to upload videos to an online site like [http://www.youtube.com YouTube] or [http://vimeo.com Vimeo]. They can easily be embedded inside Moodle from such sites and privacy can still be maintained if you choose their private video sharing option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ways of displaying video==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Linking to a video online elsewhere===&lt;br /&gt;
*If your video is hosted elsewhere online (such as YouTube or Vimeo) you can simply link to the relevant page by choosing [[URL]] from &#039;Add an activity or resource&#039; and pasting in the relevant link.&lt;br /&gt;
*Note that, in an establishment where certain video sharing sites might be banned, your students might not be able to access your video through Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Uploading a video===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If your browser allows resources to be dragged and dropped, then you can turn on the editing and drag the video directly onto the course page.&lt;br /&gt;
*A box will then appear for you to decide whether you want the video embedded in a label, or added as a clickable file resource.&lt;br /&gt;
*Alternatively, you can upload the video by turning the editing on and choosing &#039;&#039;Add an activity or  resource &amp;gt; [[File]]&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Embedding a video in its own player===&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle uses [[VideoJS player]] as its default player as it is responsive and displays video well across devices and browsers. With the [[Multimedia plugins filter]] enabled, videos may be embedded as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using the Moodle media icon====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;(Note that these instructions are for the [[Atto editor]])&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*With your editing turned on, click into the Atto editor text box where you wish to embed your video. &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Moodle media icon as in the following screenshot:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddMediaAtto.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*If your video is online, paste its URL into the Source URL box.&lt;br /&gt;
*If your video is one you want to upload, click the Video tab.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DocsVideoInsertMedia.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Browse repositories button to locate and upload your video from the repository where it is stored. (What you see depends on what the admin has enabled.) If you have it in more than one file type (such as .mov and .mp4) then you can upload an alternative video by clicking &#039;Add alternative source&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Display options&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to specify a height and width for the video&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced settings&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to decide how the video will play&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Subtitles and captions&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to add subtitle files (VTT) in different languages and/or caption files, with descriptions, chapters, and metadata. Subtitles, captions, chapters, and descriptions can be added to videos and audios using the [https://w3c.github.io/webvtt/ WebVTT file format]. These files can be created using caption making software or just a plain text editor. If the video is on YouTube, subtitles can be generated automatically then corrected. Software such as Camtasia enables subtitles to be easily added. &#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;The files must be uploaded to Moodle; they will not display if they are linked from elsewhere.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Insert media button when you are ready.&lt;br /&gt;
*Your video will appear a blue link until you save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DocsVideoVideoJS.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using a hyperlink====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;(Note: this method has no advantage over using the media icon.)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*With your editing turned on, click into the Atto editor where you wish to embed your video.&lt;br /&gt;
*Type some blank spaces (or some text) and select them.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the hyperlink icon. (The icon will only be clickable if you have selected text or spaces.)&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;Browse repositories&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*This takes you to the file picker. Follow the instructions for uploading/selecting your video as for using the Moodle media icon.&lt;br /&gt;
*When your video is chosen, it will appear in the link URL box as below. Click &#039;&#039;Insert:&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Don&#039;t panic!&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; You will now only get a blue line (if you selected blank spaces) or the actual text underlined in the Atto  editor:&lt;br /&gt;
*When you click &#039;&#039;save changes&#039;&#039; to return to the main course page, your video will display.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using embed code to display external videos====&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to your chosen video sharing site and find the embed code of the video you wish to display. Copy this code.&lt;br /&gt;
*With your editing turned on, click into the Atto editor where you wish to embed your video.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the HTML code icon as in the following screenshot:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttoEmbedCode.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Paste your embed code into the box:&lt;br /&gt;
*Save your changes&lt;br /&gt;
*Your video will display embedded in a player. Youtube videos by default play via the [[VideoJS player]].&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VideoJSOfficialMusicVideo.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Media FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Multimedia plugins filter]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/plugins/mod_jitsi Jitsi] - This module allows creating jitsi-meet videoconference sessions&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/plugins/mod_bigbluebuttonbn Big Blue Button] - Integrate BigBlueButton within Moodle - including record and playback of sessions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=143478 Best video format]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=344662 download h5p interactive video in moodle]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=386059#p1556113 Workshop Module enhances American Sign Language classroom with Video Recordings]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Language teaching]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Video]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Video]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Video&amp;diff=139645</id>
		<title>Video</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Video&amp;diff=139645"/>
		<updated>2021-02-10T10:09:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: updated screenshot&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Working with media}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Video is a very powerful tool to use in a Moodle course, allowing students, for example, to catch up on lectures they missed, learn from a &amp;quot;how-to&amp;quot; screencast, or improve their language skills by watching native speakers interact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Where to host the videos==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you upload your videos to your Moodle site,  storing them on your own server, then you retain ultimate control. If you are worried about multiple copies of the same video taking up lots of space, then that is not a problem; the Moodle file system is clever enough to only store a single copy of a file, no matter how many times you upload it to your server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When server space or upload limits are restricted, or if you are seeking some video player features not available within Moodle, it is convenient to upload videos to an online site like [http://www.youtube.com YouTube] or [http://vimeo.com Vimeo]. They can easily be embedded inside Moodle from such sites and privacy can still be maintained if you choose their private video sharing option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ways of displaying video==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Linking to a video online elsewhere===&lt;br /&gt;
*If your video is hosted elsewhere online (such as YouTube or Vimeo) you can simply link to the relevant page by choosing [[URL]] from &#039;Add an activity or resource&#039; and pasting in the relevant link.&lt;br /&gt;
*Note that, in an establishment where certain video sharing sites might be banned, your students might not be able to access your video through Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Uploading a video===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If your browser allows resources to be dragged and dropped, then you can turn on the editing and drag the video directly onto the course page.&lt;br /&gt;
*A box will then appear for you to decide whether you want the video embedded in a label, or added as a clickable file resource.&lt;br /&gt;
*Alternatively, you can upload the video by turning the editing on and choosing &#039;&#039;Add an activity or  resource &amp;gt; [[File]]&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Embedding a video in its own player===&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle uses [[VideoJS player]] as its default player as it is responsive and displays video well across devices and browsers. With the [[Multimedia plugins filter]] enabled, videos may be embedded as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using the Moodle media icon====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;(Note that these instructions are for the [[Atto editor]])&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*With your editing turned on, click into the Atto editor text box where you wish to embed your video. &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Moodle media icon as in the following screenshot:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddMediaAtto.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*If your video is online, paste its URL into the Source URL box.&lt;br /&gt;
*If your video is one you want to upload, click the Video tab.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DocsVideoInsertMedia.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Browse repositories button to locate and upload your video from the repository where it is stored. (What you see depends on what the admin has enabled.) If you have it in more than one file type (such as .mov and .mp4) then you can upload an alternative video by clicking &#039;Add alternative source&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Display options&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to specify a height and width for the video&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced settings&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to decide how the video will play&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Subtitles and captions&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to add subtitle files (VTT) in different languages and/or caption files, with descriptions, chapters, and metadata. Subtitles, captions, chapters, and descriptions can be added to videos and audios using the [https://w3c.github.io/webvtt/ WebVTT file format]. These files can be created using caption making software or just a plain text editor. If the video is on YouTube, subtitles can be generated automatically then corrected. Software such as Camtasia enables subtitles to be easily added. &#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;The files must be uploaded to Moodle; they will not display if they are linked from elsewhere.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Insert media button when you are ready.&lt;br /&gt;
*Your video will appear a blue link until you save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DocsVideoVideoJS.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using a hyperlink====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;(Note: this method has no advantage over using the media icon.)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*With your editing turned on, click into the Atto editor where you wish to embed your video.&lt;br /&gt;
*Type some blank spaces (or some text) and select them.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the hyperlink icon as in the following screenshot. (The icon will only be clickable if you have selected text or spaces.)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Hyperlinkicon.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;Browse repositories&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*This takes you to the file picker. Follow the instructions for uploading/selecting your video as for using the Moodle media icon.&lt;br /&gt;
*When your video is chosen, it will appear in the link URL box as below. Click &#039;&#039;Insert:&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Don&#039;t panic!&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; You will now only get a blue line (if you selected blank spaces) or the actual text underlined in the Atto  editor:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:linklinkatto.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*When you click &#039;&#039;save changes&#039;&#039; to return to the main course page, your video will display.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using embed code to display external videos====&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to your chosen video sharing site and find the embed code of the video you wish to display. Copy this code.&lt;br /&gt;
*With your editing turned on, click into the Atto editor where you wish to embed your video.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the HTML code icon as in the following screenshot:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttoEmbedCode.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Paste your embed code into the box:&lt;br /&gt;
*Save your changes&lt;br /&gt;
*Your video will display embedded in a player. Youtube videos by default play via the [[VideoJS player]].&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VideoJSOfficialMusicVideo.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Media FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Multimedia plugins filter]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/plugins/mod_jitsi Jitsi] - This module allows creating jitsi-meet videoconference sessions&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/plugins/mod_bigbluebuttonbn Big Blue Button] - Integrate BigBlueButton within Moodle - including record and playback of sessions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=143478 Best video format]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=344662 download h5p interactive video in moodle]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=386059#p1556113 Workshop Module enhances American Sign Language classroom with Video Recordings]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Language teaching]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Video]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Video]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=File:AddMediaAtto.png&amp;diff=139644</id>
		<title>File:AddMediaAtto.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=File:AddMediaAtto.png&amp;diff=139644"/>
		<updated>2021-02-10T10:08:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Working_with_files&amp;diff=139643</id>
		<title>Working with files</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Working_with_files&amp;diff=139643"/>
		<updated>2021-02-10T10:06:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: removing out of date screenshots&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Managing content}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding files to your course==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle provides an easy way for a teacher to present materials to their students. These materials may take the form of files such as word-processed documents or slideshow presentations. The materials can be displayed on the page either as individual items or bundled together inside folders. One teacher might for instance wish to share a single research document in pdf format; another might have a folder of sample past examination papers for students to download. Most types of files can be uploaded and accessed through Moodle but the student needs to have the correct software to be able to open them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add files to a Moodle course, you must first ensure you have the editing turned on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Drag and drop===&lt;br /&gt;
*If you are using a modern browser, you can simply click, hold and drag and drop a file directly onto your course page. You will know if drag and drop is available to you because you will (briefly) see a message at the top of your screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:dragdropmessage.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To drag and drop a folder, you must first compress/zip it using whichever program your computer has.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{MediaPlayer | url = https://youtu.be/TzH0N1-70gg | desc = Dragging and dropping files}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Add a resource or activity===&lt;br /&gt;
*Instead of drag and drop, you can click the link &#039;Add an activity or resource&#039; and  select either [[File]] or [[Folder]] from the activity chooser.&lt;br /&gt;
{{MediaPlayer | url = https://youtu.be/fcikQXrfNrM | desc = Uploading files}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The screen for uploading and displaying a file (or folder of files) includes an &amp;quot;add&amp;quot; button. Clicking on this button takes you to the [[File picker]] which is the name given to the file storage and access area within Moodle. Find out more about the places you can upload or add files from in the [[File picker]] page.&lt;br /&gt;
*There is also a block (with an arrow) into which you can drag and drop a file straight from your desktop into Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Unzipping uploaded files==&lt;br /&gt;
If you upload a single zipped file, Moodle will automatically unzip it for your students to see it in Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you upload a number of files as a single zipped file, either as [[File]], nor inside a [[Folder]], Moodle will force the download.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Viewing uploaded files==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Once uploaded, files appear as thumbnails in the file manager for easy recognition.&lt;br /&gt;
* Files view can be easily toggled between icons view or a table view with sizes and dates, or a hierarchical list view. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:truthumbnailsiconsview.png|thumb|File picker icon view]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:tableview.png|thumb|File picker table view]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:hierarchicallistview.png|thumb|File picker hierarchical list view]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing or updating uploaded files==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Clicking on the  name of an uploaded file opens up a pop up dialogue box which allows file details quickly to be altered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating an alias/shortcut==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*When an uploaded file - or a file from the [[Content bank]], Private files, Dropbox, File system or EQUELLA repositories - is re-used elsewhere on Moodle, the teacher has the option to make a copy (a new, unconnected version) or to create a shortcut or &#039;&#039;alias&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
*If an alias is created, then when the original file is updated, it will change in all instances of the alias. So a teacher might add course notes to their private files for example, and then add them into a number of courses. When the teacher makes an alteration in the file in their private files, this alteration will be reflected in all instances of the course notes.&lt;br /&gt;
*An alias can be recognised by its thumbnail. See the difference in the screenshot below between the original file (left) and the alias (right):&lt;br /&gt;
*To update a file, go to its original location (for example Private files) and upload your new version &#039;&#039;with the same name&#039;&#039; . You will be prompted to override or rename the file. Choose &amp;quot;override&amp;quot; and this file will replace your original file and the alisas/shortcuts will remain and all be updated to your latest version.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:alias.png|thumb|Creating an alias]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:shortcut1.png|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SCORM files cannot be updated where alias/shortcut are used==&lt;br /&gt;
Note: while it is possible to create alias files for SCORM activities, it is not possible to update the source file and have changes replicated in the alias.&lt;br /&gt;
Updating the original SCORM (.zip) file will update this location but all alias will convert to &#039;true copies&#039; of the original and alias will be removed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Areas in which aliases cannot be made===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An alias cannot be made in the following areas of Moodle:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* an assignment submission&lt;br /&gt;
* a forum post attachment&lt;br /&gt;
* a workshop submission&lt;br /&gt;
* a quiz essay&lt;br /&gt;
* a database activity file field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is to prevent cases such as a student uploading an item for assessment and then subsequently changing the original in their private files. When a student uses a file from their private files in one of these instances, they do not see the options to &amp;quot;copy&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;create an alias&amp;quot;. Below is an example of a file added to an assignment:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:aliasassignment.png|thumb|Assignment submission with no option to create an alias]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can add new file types and view, edit and delete existing file types from &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; File types&#039;&#039;. This means that, for example, if teachers and students on your site use a lot of files specific to a particular program, such files can now be recognised by Moodle, and, when downloaded, they will open in the correct program, rather than presenting themselves as a generic zip file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Filetypes1.png|center|thumb|500px||Some examples from the list]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding a new file type===&lt;br /&gt;
1. Scroll down to the bottom of the page and click the &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the details of your file type, using the example below as a guide. This example will add the .mobi extension (for a Kindle ebook) with the standard document icon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:newfiletype.png|thumb|center|500px|Adding a new filetype]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE: The mimetype is set for a file when it is added/uploaded in Moodle (not when it is downloaded). If you change the mimetype associated with a file extension it will not make any difference to existing files. Only files uploaded in the future will have the new mimetype.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Click to save the changes and you will see your new file type has been added to the list:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:customfileypesuccess.png|thumb|500px|center|New type in the list]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Restricting allowed file types===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Allowed file types for [[Workshop]] submissions may be restricted&lt;br /&gt;
* It is possible to restrict file types for assignments. See [[Assignment settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Removing a file type===&lt;br /&gt;
*Clicking the X next to a file type will remove it from the site. You will be prompted to confirm before deletion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Editing an existing file type===&lt;br /&gt;
*Clicking the edit icon next to a file type will allow you to change certain details, for example the associated icon and description. If you don&#039;t wish to use the default description, you can specify your own custom description (with multi-language tags if your site supports multi-languages) or you can use an alternative language string from mimetypes.php.&lt;br /&gt;
===Google docs and docx===&lt;br /&gt;
Importing Google docs files as docx.  See https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=320144&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Alternative to MS PowerPoint and PDF files==&lt;br /&gt;
The [https://moodle.org/plugins/mod_revealjs Presentation] additional plugin displays multimedia HTML5 presentations and slide shows in users&#039; web browsers. A web friendly and more feature rich alternative to MS PowerPoint and PDF. However, presentations must be uploaded to moodledata via FTP and you&#039;ll need to learn some basic HTML to create presentations for it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*HQ Youtube video tutorial: [http://youtu.be/Wt5Hgv-eouE Dragging and dropping files into Moodle].&lt;br /&gt;
*HQ Youtube video tutorial: [http://youtu.be/7i2roZ_OCyI Uploading files to Moodle].&lt;br /&gt;
*How to share a single file with students: [[File resource]].&lt;br /&gt;
*How to share a folder of files with students: [[Folder]].&lt;br /&gt;
*Questions about the file picker: [[File picker FAQ]].&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Restoring file aliases]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Utilisation de fichiers]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Arbeiten mit Dateien und Verzeichnissen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Trabajando con archivos]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Working_with_files&amp;diff=139642</id>
		<title>Working with files</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Working_with_files&amp;diff=139642"/>
		<updated>2021-02-10T10:04:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: removing out of date screenshots&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Managing content}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding files to your course==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle provides an easy way for a teacher to present materials to their students. These materials may take the form of files such as word-processed documents or slideshow presentations. The materials can be displayed on the page either as individual items or bundled together inside folders. One teacher might for instance wish to share a single research document in pdf format; another might have a folder of sample past examination papers for students to download. Most types of files can be uploaded and accessed through Moodle but the student needs to have the correct software to be able to open them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add files to a Moodle course, you must first ensure you have the editing turned on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Drag and drop===&lt;br /&gt;
*If you are using a modern browser, you can simply click, hold and drag and drop a file directly onto your course page. You will know if drag and drop is available to you because you will (briefly) see a message at the top of your screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:dragdropmessage.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To drag and drop a folder, you must first compress/zip it using whichever program your computer has.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{MediaPlayer | url = https://youtu.be/TzH0N1-70gg | desc = Dragging and dropping files}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Add a resource or activity===&lt;br /&gt;
*Instead of drag and drop, you can click the link &#039;Add an activity or resource&#039; and  select either [[File]] or [[Folder]] from the activity chooser.&lt;br /&gt;
{{MediaPlayer | url = https://youtu.be/fcikQXrfNrM | desc = Uploading files}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The screen for uploading and displaying a file (or folder of files) includes an &amp;quot;add&amp;quot; button. Clicking on this button takes you to the [[File picker]] which is the name given to the file storage and access area within Moodle. Find out more about the places you can upload or add files from in the [[File picker]] page.&lt;br /&gt;
*There is also a block (with an arrow) into which you can drag and drop a file straight from your desktop into Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Unzipping uploaded files==&lt;br /&gt;
If you upload a single zipped file, Moodle will automatically unzip it for your students to see it in Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you upload a number of files as a single zipped file, either as [[File]], nor inside a [[Folder]], Moodle will force the download.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Viewing uploaded files==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Once uploaded, files appear as thumbnails in the file manager for easy recognition.&lt;br /&gt;
* Files view can be easily toggled between icons view or a table view with sizes and dates, or a hierarchical list view. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:truthumbnailsiconsview.png|thumb|File picker icon view]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:tableview.png|thumb|File picker table view]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:hierarchicallistview.png|thumb|File picker hierarchical list view]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing or updating uploaded files==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Clicking on the  name of an uploaded file opens up a pop up dialogue box which allows file details quickly to be altered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:popupdialogue.png|thumb|File info popup dialogue]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating an alias/shortcut==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*When an uploaded file - or a file from the [[Content bank]], Private files, Dropbox, File system or EQUELLA repositories - is re-used elsewhere on Moodle, the teacher has the option to make a copy (a new, unconnected version) or to create a shortcut or &#039;&#039;alias&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
*If an alias is created, then when the original file is updated, it will change in all instances of the alias. So a teacher might add course notes to their private files for example, and then add them into a number of courses. When the teacher makes an alteration in the file in their private files, this alteration will be reflected in all instances of the course notes.&lt;br /&gt;
*An alias can be recognised by its thumbnail. See the difference in the screenshot below between the original file (left) and the alias (right):&lt;br /&gt;
*To update a file, go to its original location (for example Private files) and upload your new version &#039;&#039;with the same name&#039;&#039; . You will be prompted to override or rename the file. Choose &amp;quot;override&amp;quot; and this file will replace your original file and the alisas/shortcuts will remain and all be updated to your latest version.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:alias.png|thumb|Creating an alias]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:shortcut1.png|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SCORM files cannot be updated where alias/shortcut are used==&lt;br /&gt;
Note: while it is possible to create alias files for SCORM activities, it is not possible to update the source file and have changes replicated in the alias.&lt;br /&gt;
Updating the original SCORM (.zip) file will update this location but all alias will convert to &#039;true copies&#039; of the original and alias will be removed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Areas in which aliases cannot be made===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An alias cannot be made in the following areas of Moodle:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* an assignment submission&lt;br /&gt;
* a forum post attachment&lt;br /&gt;
* a workshop submission&lt;br /&gt;
* a quiz essay&lt;br /&gt;
* a database activity file field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is to prevent cases such as a student uploading an item for assessment and then subsequently changing the original in their private files. When a student uses a file from their private files in one of these instances, they do not see the options to &amp;quot;copy&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;create an alias&amp;quot;. Below is an example of a file added to an assignment:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:aliasassignment.png|thumb|Assignment submission with no option to create an alias]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can add new file types and view, edit and delete existing file types from &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; File types&#039;&#039;. This means that, for example, if teachers and students on your site use a lot of files specific to a particular program, such files can now be recognised by Moodle, and, when downloaded, they will open in the correct program, rather than presenting themselves as a generic zip file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Filetypes1.png|center|thumb|500px||Some examples from the list]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding a new file type===&lt;br /&gt;
1. Scroll down to the bottom of the page and click the &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the details of your file type, using the example below as a guide. This example will add the .mobi extension (for a Kindle ebook) with the standard document icon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:newfiletype.png|thumb|center|500px|Adding a new filetype]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE: The mimetype is set for a file when it is added/uploaded in Moodle (not when it is downloaded). If you change the mimetype associated with a file extension it will not make any difference to existing files. Only files uploaded in the future will have the new mimetype.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Click to save the changes and you will see your new file type has been added to the list:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:customfileypesuccess.png|thumb|500px|center|New type in the list]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Restricting allowed file types===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Allowed file types for [[Workshop]] submissions may be restricted&lt;br /&gt;
* It is possible to restrict file types for assignments. See [[Assignment settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Removing a file type===&lt;br /&gt;
*Clicking the X next to a file type will remove it from the site. You will be prompted to confirm before deletion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Editing an existing file type===&lt;br /&gt;
*Clicking the edit icon next to a file type will allow you to change certain details, for example the associated icon and description. If you don&#039;t wish to use the default description, you can specify your own custom description (with multi-language tags if your site supports multi-languages) or you can use an alternative language string from mimetypes.php.&lt;br /&gt;
===Google docs and docx===&lt;br /&gt;
Importing Google docs files as docx.  See https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=320144&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Alternative to MS PowerPoint and PDF files==&lt;br /&gt;
The [https://moodle.org/plugins/mod_revealjs Presentation] additional plugin displays multimedia HTML5 presentations and slide shows in users&#039; web browsers. A web friendly and more feature rich alternative to MS PowerPoint and PDF. However, presentations must be uploaded to moodledata via FTP and you&#039;ll need to learn some basic HTML to create presentations for it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*HQ Youtube video tutorial: [http://youtu.be/Wt5Hgv-eouE Dragging and dropping files into Moodle].&lt;br /&gt;
*HQ Youtube video tutorial: [http://youtu.be/7i2roZ_OCyI Uploading files to Moodle].&lt;br /&gt;
*How to share a single file with students: [[File resource]].&lt;br /&gt;
*How to share a folder of files with students: [[Folder]].&lt;br /&gt;
*Questions about the file picker: [[File picker FAQ]].&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Restoring file aliases]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Utilisation de fichiers]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Arbeiten mit Dateien und Verzeichnissen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Trabajando con archivos]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Course_homepage&amp;diff=139641</id>
		<title>Course homepage</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Course_homepage&amp;diff=139641"/>
		<updated>2021-02-10T10:02:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: removed old video&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Courses}}&lt;br /&gt;
===Parts of a course homepage===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Watch the screencasts &#039;&#039;&#039;[https://youtu.be/ZsNK44EqRkg What is a course?]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[https://youtu.be/y12xYdGOq0s How to lay out your course]&#039;&#039;&#039; for an introduction on setting up your course homepage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Moodle course can look very different according to the theme and course format (layout). Here are a blank course page using the [[Boost theme]] and the Classic theme, both with standard weekly format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 [[File:BoostExampleBlocks.png|thumb|center||600px|Empty course with Boost theme showing  side blocks]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 [[File:ExampleClassic.png|thumb|600px|center|Empty course with Classic theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.[[Navigation block]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Normally visible on all pages, this block  helps you find your way around the course and site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.[[Administration block]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Again, normally visible on all pages, this block gives different levels of access to teachers and students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.[[Course formats|Course sections]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where the learning materials are displayed. This element may be arranged in one or multiple weeks, topics, forums or other (non-standard) layouts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.[[Blocks|Side blocks]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Which blocks you see depend on what the administrator has selected and what you as teacher choose to add.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Navigation drawer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This replaces the [[Navigation block]] and [[Administration block]] in the Boost theme. For course section links to appear, &#039;Always link course sections&#039; (linkcoursesections) must be enabled by an administrator in the Site administration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Gear menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This replaces the course administration settings in the Boost theme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===To edit a course section===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn editing on&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the pencil icon (1 in screenshot below) to quickly rename the section&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Edit menu (2 in screenshot below) to edit the description and other settings.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:31editsection.png|thumb|center|600px|Section editing menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If [[Restrict access]] is enabled for the site, access to the section (including all activities and resources within it) may be restricted. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===To move a course section===&lt;br /&gt;
#Turn editing on&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the up/down arrow or the crosshairs icon to move the section&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the section to where you want to position it and let go&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: The ability to move course sections is controlled by the capability [[Capabilities/moodle/course:movesections|moodle/course:movesections]], which is allowed for the default role of teacher.&lt;br /&gt;
===To add course sections===&lt;br /&gt;
#Turn editing on&lt;br /&gt;
#Click  &#039;Add topics/weeks&#039; underneath the bottom section&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the number of extra sections you wish and press &#039;Add topics/weeks&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:33Addtopics.png|thumb|400px|center|Adding sections]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===To delete a course section===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the editing turned on, click the &#039;Edit&#039; link to the right of the course section you wish to delete and then, from the menu that displays,  click &#039;X Delete&#039;. You will be prompted to confirm your wish to delete the section and its contents. Note that all activities inside the section and their user data will also be deleted. Use the [[Recycle bin]] to reverse this if you do it by mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===To link course sections===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An admin setting &#039;&#039;Always link course sections&#039;&#039; can be enabled from &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Navigation&#039;&#039; and will link course sections so that when a course section name is clicked in the navigation block or the central content area, it will go directly to that section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Blocks==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the theme, blocks are displayed in the right and/or left columns of the course page. The [[Boost theme]] only displays blocks on the right, and when using the [[Moodle Mobile app]] blocks do not display at all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a block to the course page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Turn on the editing from the gear menu of  the button top right depending on your theme.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select a block from the &amp;quot;Add block&amp;quot; link, either at the bottom of the nav drawer on the left or a drop down menu usually on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To move a block&lt;br /&gt;
#Ensure editing is turned on then click onto the block title until the crosshair icon appears&lt;br /&gt;
#While keeping the block selected, drag it to where you want to position it and let go.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the up/down arrow&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the place holder (a zone with a dashed border) where you want the block to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:moveblocksnew.png|thumb|Crosshair icon for moving a block]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Moveblocks.png|thumb|Up/down arrow icon for moving a block]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Activities and resources==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add an activity or resource to the course&lt;br /&gt;
*Turn on the editing from the button top right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;Add an activity or resource&#039; to open the activity chooser. Double-click to add an activity or resource; click the i for more information and click the star icon to add it to a separate, starred tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If desired, the activity chooser may be disabled from Course preferences from the [[Preferences]] link in the user menu. This will then display two separate resource and activity dropdown menus.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; The Moodle admin can switch this off by default in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; AJAX and Javascript&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:activity chooser.png|thumb|The activity chooser]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, certain resources and activities may be added using drag and drop:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To add a [[File|file]], simply drag and drop it onto the course section where you&#039;d like it to appear&lt;br /&gt;
*To add a [[Folder|folder of files]], simply zip the folder then drag and drop it onto the course section where you&#039;d like it to appear, answer &#039;Unzip files and create folder&#039; to the popup dialogue, then click the upload button&lt;br /&gt;
*To add a [[SCORM module|SCORM package]], simply drag and drop it onto the course section where you&#039;d like it to appear, answer &#039;Add a SCORM package&#039; to the popup dialogue, then click the upload button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Moving between activities===&lt;br /&gt;
Underneath each activity is a link on the left to the previous activity and on the right to the next activity. A jump-to menu also allows you to choose other activities from the course page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CHPActivityLinks.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing elements on your course homepage==&lt;br /&gt;
With the editing turned on, activities, resources and blocks will have icons performing different functions such as edit/move/copy/delete/hide.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Your theme may have icons different from these below:&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Image:pencil.png]] - the pencil icon allows you to edit inline the title of the resource / activity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Image:26actionicon.png|150px]] - this icon groups actions together for easier editing on smaller screens. Click to reveal the options. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Image:moveajax24.png]]- the move icon allows you to move items or sections by dragging and dropping. (If you have many activities to scroll through while moving, see the Tips and Tricks section below for a useful suggestion.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Image:movenoajaz241.png]] - this move icon appears if you don&#039;t have Ajax enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:groups24.png]] - the groups icon allows you to change between no groups or separate/visible groups&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Image:movenoajax24.png]] - the move here icon appears when moving a course element without Ajax. Click into the box to re-locate your item. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:topicmove24.png]] - the up/down arrows allow you to move course sections up or down and  appear if you do not have Ajax enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tips and tricks==&lt;br /&gt;
===Moving items in a course with many activities===&lt;br /&gt;
If you click and drag an activity or resource on a course page which has many items, this might cause you difficulties with &amp;quot;scroll of death&amp;quot; issues. Instead of dragging the activity to move it, click on it. It will display a list of all the items on your page and you just need to click to select where on the course page you want the item to be moved to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:alternativemovemethod.png|thumb|center|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Make your course home page look more like a webpage - see [[Stealth activities]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Activity and resource descriptions can be displayed on the course page just below the link to the activity or resource by clicking the &#039;Display description on course page&#039; checkbox in the activity or resource settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Course homepage capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/course:sectionvisibility|Control section visibility]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/course:setcurrentsection|Set current section]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Página principal del curso]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Page d&#039;accueil de cours]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:コースホームページ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Kursseite]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Feedback_activity&amp;diff=139636</id>
		<title>Feedback activity</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Feedback_activity&amp;diff=139636"/>
		<updated>2021-02-09T11:50:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* What is the Feedback activity? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Activities}}&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
==What is the Feedback activity?==&lt;br /&gt;
The Feedback activity allows you to create and conduct surveys to collect feedback. Unlike the [[Survey module|Survey]] tool it allows you to write your own questions, rather than choose from a list of pre-written questions and unlike the [[Quiz_module|Quiz]] tool, you can create non-graded questions.  The Feedback activity is ideal for course or teacher evaluations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{MediaPlayer | url = https://youtu.be/6NIfjmktfl4 | desc = Overview of the Feedback activity}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How is it set up?==&lt;br /&gt;
#In a course, with the editing turned on, choose &#039;Feedback&#039; from the activity chooser.&lt;br /&gt;
#Give it a name and if required, a description&lt;br /&gt;
# Expand the other sections to define the settings you want, in particular Question and Submission settings and what to display After submission.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click Save and display and from the Edit questions tab, Add question drop down, add the questions you want.&lt;br /&gt;
==How does it work?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Student view===&lt;br /&gt;
Students click on the Feedback icon in the course to access the activity and then must click the button Answer the questions. (Note: the magnifying glass icon is only for previewing, not for submitting responses.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:studentfeedback.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Teacher view===&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers see the Feedback settings tabs as well as an Analysis tab and Show responses tab. The results may be exported to a spreadsheet program .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the Analysis tab they see a graphical (and text) display of reponses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the Show responses tab they see individual responses in detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TeacherFeedback.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More information==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Feedback settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Building Feedback]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Feedback]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Feedback FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Feedback block]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|If you don&#039;t see the Feedback activity, ask the admin to check it has been  enabled.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Feedback]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Feedback]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Actividad de retroalimentación]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Feedback]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Feedback]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Lesson_activity&amp;diff=139635</id>
		<title>Lesson activity</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Lesson_activity&amp;diff=139635"/>
		<updated>2021-02-09T11:50:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* What is the Lesson activity? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Activities}}&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
==What is the Lesson activity?==&lt;br /&gt;
The Lesson activity allows teachers to create &#039;branching&#039; exercises where students are presented with content and then, depending on their responses, are directed to specific pages. The content may be text or multimedia.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{MediaPlayer | url = https://youtu.be/pYJfz6vh_A0 | desc = Overview of the Lesson activity}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How is it set up?==&lt;br /&gt;
#In a course, with the editing turned on, choose &#039;Lesson&#039; from the activity chooser.&lt;br /&gt;
#Give it a name and, if required, a description.&lt;br /&gt;
# Expand the other sections to select the settings you want, including whether the Lesson is for practice or will be graded.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click Save and Display and from the Edit tab, add your first page. This will usually be a Content page (where you add information) or a Question page (where you can select a question type.)&lt;br /&gt;
#Make sure the &#039;Jumps&#039; take you to the next page (if you want.) &#039;Jumps&#039; direct the student to where they should go next. Once you have made all your pages, return and edit each Jump so it shows the correct page name&lt;br /&gt;
#When you have saved your first page, continue adding pages from the Collapsed tab &amp;gt; Actions menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How does it work?==&lt;br /&gt;
===Student view===&lt;br /&gt;
Students click on the Lesson icon in the course to access it and, depending on the teacher&#039;s settings see a page of information and are prompted to choose an option from a selection of possible responses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LessonStudentView.png|center|600px|Student view of a Lesson first page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Lesson may be timed, and it may display a progress bar. It may have a table of contents showing all pages, or the navigation may be hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Teacher view===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers see additional tabs when they access the Lesson. They can preview the flow, edit pages, view reports and  grade essays (if Essay questions were used.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LessonTeacherView.png|center|600px|Teacher view of Lesson]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More information==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Lesson settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Building Lesson]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Lesson]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Lesson FAQ]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Lesson]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Actividad de lección]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Ikasgaiak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Leçon]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Lektion]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fi:Oppitunti (aktiviteetti)]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Database_activity&amp;diff=139634</id>
		<title>Database activity</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Database_activity&amp;diff=139634"/>
		<updated>2021-02-09T11:49:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* What is the Database activity? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Activities}}&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
==What is the Database activity?==&lt;br /&gt;
The Database activity allows the teacher and/or students to build, display and search a bank of record entries about any conceivable topic. The format and structure of these entries can be almost unlimited, including images, files, URLs, numbers and text amongst other things. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{MediaPlayer | url = https://youtu.be/HQXLBftomWQ | desc = Overview of the Database activity}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How is it set up?==&lt;br /&gt;
#In a course, with the editing turned on, choose &#039;Database&#039; from the activity chooser.&lt;br /&gt;
#Give it a name and, if needed, a description.&lt;br /&gt;
#Expand the other sections to define the settings you want, in particular the Entries section.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click Save and Display&lt;br /&gt;
#Create a new field from the dropdown, repeating as necessary, or click the link choose a defined set to import an existing preset.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the Templates tab to edit and save templates. For more help, see [[Database templates]]&lt;br /&gt;
==How does it work?==&lt;br /&gt;
===Student view===&lt;br /&gt;
Students click on the Database icon in the course to access it and add an entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can usually see entries individually (View single) and in a list (List view) and are able to search entries.&lt;br /&gt;
===Teacher view===&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers additionally see the set up tabs and can edit,delete, approve/unapprove entries as required.&lt;br /&gt;
==More information==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Database activity settings|Database settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Building Database]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Database templates]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Database]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Database activity FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Database activity module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datenbank]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Base_de_datos_%28m%C3%B3dulo%29]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Datu-basea]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Base de données]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:データベースモジュール]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Workshop_activity&amp;diff=139633</id>
		<title>Workshop activity</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Workshop_activity&amp;diff=139633"/>
		<updated>2021-02-09T11:48:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* What is the Workshop activity? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Activities}}&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
==What is the Workshop activity?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Workshop is a powerful peer assessment activity. Students add submissions which are then distributed amongst their peers for assessment based on a grading scale specified by the teacher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{MediaPlayer | url = https://youtu.be/7cYG1d87jSo | desc = Overview of the Workshop activity}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How is it set up?==&lt;br /&gt;
#In a course, with the editing turned on, choose &#039;Workshop&#039; from the activity chooser.&lt;br /&gt;
#Give it a name and, if needed, a description&lt;br /&gt;
#Expand the other sections to select the settings you want. If you are not sure, leave everything as default. See [[Workshop settings]] for more detailed information.&lt;br /&gt;
#Grading settings - students receive two grades, one for the work they submit and one for the quality of their peer assessments. The page [[Workshop grading strategies]] explains this more.&lt;br /&gt;
#Submission settings is where you explain the task they must submit.&lt;br /&gt;
#Assessment settings is where you give a brief outline of how they will assess the work of their peers.&lt;br /&gt;
#Feedback will, if enabled, allow students to add text comments when they review each other&#039;s work.&lt;br /&gt;
#Example submissions, if enabled, allows you to provide examples for students to practise with before they begin peer assessing. (Enabling this opens more options.)&lt;br /&gt;
#Availability gives you the option to allow students to start peer assessing as soon as the submission deadline is over, rather than you enabling this manually.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click Save and display and explore the Workshop phases in the section Teacher view below, making sure you complete the Set up phase and switch to the Submission phase when you want your students to begin the activity.&lt;br /&gt;
==How does it work?==&lt;br /&gt;
===Student view===&lt;br /&gt;
*Students click on the Workshop icon in the course to access it. Initially they will see either the Set up phase (if the teacher is still preparing the Workshop) or the Submission phase when they are allowed to submit.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:38SubmissionPhase.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Other phases will be highlighted at different times depending on the teacher&#039;s settings. During the Assessment phase, students scroll down the page to view the submissions they must review:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:StudentAssessmentPhaseInstructions.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Once grades are calculated and finalised, and the workshop is closed, students see their two grades.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:closedworkshop.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
===Teacher view===&lt;br /&gt;
Once a Workshop activity has been created and saved, it is in the Set up phase. It must be in the Submission phase for students to be able to submit work and then moved to the Assessment phase for them to review each other&#039;s submissions. The switch may automatic or manual.&lt;br /&gt;
====Setup phase====&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;Edit assessment form&#039; to provide detailed grading criteria for your students to use. When finished, click &#039;Save and close&#039;, and all ticks on the Setup phase will be the same colour.&lt;br /&gt;
*You are ready to switch to the Submission phase which lets students send in their work. Click the icon or text at the top of Submission phase. This phase will be highlighted.&lt;br /&gt;
====Submission phase====&lt;br /&gt;
*Students will now be able to submit their work during this time, until any deadline you specified - unless you also allowed late submissions.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the link &#039;Allocate submissions&#039; to decide if you yourself want to choose which student assesses whose work (&#039;&#039;Manual allocation&#039;&#039;), or if you want Moodle to choose for you (&#039;&#039;Random allocation&#039;&#039;) And do you want students to assess others&#039; work even if they have not submitted anything themselves?&lt;br /&gt;
*If,in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Availability&#039;&#039;&#039; section you set the workshop to switch to the submission phase automatically once the submission deadline is over, choose &#039;&#039;Scheduled allocation.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:33workshopsubmissionphase.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*You can see how many have submitted and how many still need to submit. Click the icon or text to move to the Assessment phase if you chose to switch phases yourself. The phase will be highlighted. (Remember that you can move back a phase if you need to, for example if you want to allow a student to resubmit.)&lt;br /&gt;
====Assessment phase====&lt;br /&gt;
*Students will assess the work of their peers according to the instructions and criteria you gave them.&lt;br /&gt;
*You can monitor their progress by looking at the grades underneath the phases screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:workshopqgreport.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*When you are ready, click the icon or text to move to the Grading evaluation phase. This phase will be highlighted. &lt;br /&gt;
====Grading evaluation phase====&lt;br /&gt;
*Here, Moodle calculates the final grades for submission and for assessment. The page &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Using Workshop]]&#039;&#039;&#039; gives more details on how the grading works.&lt;br /&gt;
*For the grade for assessment, you can decide how strict you want the comparison to be. If you are not sure, leave it as the default &#039;fair&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*You can recalcuate the grades several times.&lt;br /&gt;
*You can change grades here if you need to.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can show to other students selected submissions if you wish. Click on a submission in the workshop grades report (image above) and scroll down to &#039;Feedback for the author&#039;. Tick the box to publish this submission. Other students will see it once the workshop is closed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Closing the workshop====&lt;br /&gt;
When you are satisfied with the final grading, click the icon or text to close the workshop. The Closed phase will be highlighted and students will be able to see their grades, any published submissions and a conclusion if you added one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More information==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Workshop settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Using Workshop]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Workshop FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Workshop grading strategies]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Gegenseitige Beurteilung]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Actividad de taller]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Atelier]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Atto_editor&amp;diff=139620</id>
		<title>Atto editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Atto_editor&amp;diff=139620"/>
		<updated>2021-02-08T09:01:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* Adding extra buttons */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Editing text}}&lt;br /&gt;
==The Atto text editor==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Atto text editor (sometimes referred to as the &#039;HTML editor&#039;) has many icons to assist the user in entering content.  Many of these icons and functions should be familiar to anyone who uses a word processor.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some examples of where you will see the text editor include: Editing Section headings, description of an activity, writing an answer to a quiz question or editing the content of many blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default text editor in Moodle is the Atto editor, built specifically for Moodle. There is also a [[TinyMCE editor]] and a plain text editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Text editors can be enabled, disabled or a different one set to default from &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Text editors &amp;gt; Manage editors&#039;&#039;. The order of priority may also be specified here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If more than one text editor is enabled, users can select their preferred editor via their preferences page in the user menu (top right).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
{{MediaPlayer | url = https://youtu.be/fEtGcVz0pzE | desc = }}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Atto features==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Image copy and paste===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Moodle 3.9 onwards, images can be copied from anywhere and pasted into the Atto editor. For example, you can take a screenshot, copy it to your clipboard and then paste it into the Atto editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Image drag and drop===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your browser allows it (and if it does, you will see a message at the top of your screen when the editing is on) you can add images into the Atto editor simply by dragging them from your computer:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Attodragdrop29.png|thumb|600px|center|Drag an image directly into the editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Autosave===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Text typed into the Atto editor is automatically saved if you leave the page. The default of 60 seconds may be changed by the administrator in &#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Text editors&amp;gt;Atto HTML editor&amp;gt;Atto toolbar settings.&#039;&#039; If the user accidentally closes the tab or otherwise leaves the form without submitting, the text in the editor will be restored next time he opens the page. To discard  a restored draft, the  user needs to cancel the form or press the &amp;quot;Undo&amp;quot; button in the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AtttoAutosave.png|thumb|600px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Atto editor toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Attotopline1382.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Atto Row 1 default buttons&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 1. Expand&lt;br /&gt;
| 2. Style&lt;br /&gt;
| 3. Bold&lt;br /&gt;
| 4. Italic&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 5. Bulleted list&lt;br /&gt;
| 6. Numbered list&lt;br /&gt;
| 7. Add link&lt;br /&gt;
| 8. Unlink &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 9. Add image&lt;br /&gt;
| 10. Add smiley (if enabled)&lt;br /&gt;
| 11. Add media&lt;br /&gt;
| 12. Record audio&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 13. Record video&lt;br /&gt;
| 14. Manage embedded files&lt;br /&gt;
| 15. H5P&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Attobottomline.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Atto Row 2 default buttons&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 1. Underline&lt;br /&gt;
| 2. Strikethrough&lt;br /&gt;
| 3. Subscript&lt;br /&gt;
| 4. Superscript&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 5. Align left/centre/right&lt;br /&gt;
| 6. Decrease/increase indent&lt;br /&gt;
| 7. Equation editor&lt;br /&gt;
| 8. Special character&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 9. Table&lt;br /&gt;
| 10. Clear formatting&lt;br /&gt;
| 11. Undo/redo&lt;br /&gt;
| 12. Accessibility checker&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 13. Screenreader helper&lt;br /&gt;
| 14. HTML/code view&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Manage embedded files===&lt;br /&gt;
This allows users to add, delete or override files embedded in the current text area, for example in a label or topic summary. (It complements the [[Embedded files repository]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:26embeddefiles2.png|thumb|400px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Accessibility checker===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the tools available in the text editor is an automated [[Accessibility|accessibility]] checker which checks for some common errors in the text. These are usually things in the way the text is constructed that can prevent all users from having equal access to information and functionality. The list of problems that the accessibility checker looks for is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Images with missing or empty alt text (unless they have the presentation role)&lt;br /&gt;
* Contrast of font colour and background colour meets [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Web_Content_Accessibility_Guidelines WCAG AA guidelines]&lt;br /&gt;
* Long blocks of text are sufficiently broken up into headings&lt;br /&gt;
* All tables require captions&lt;br /&gt;
* Tables should not contain merged cells as they are difficult to navigate with screen readers&lt;br /&gt;
* All tables should contain row or column headers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Screenreader helper===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Screen readers basically treat a content editable region like a text box - which is wrong, because it can contain images, links and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen reader helper provides additional information about the currently selected text (e.g. is it bold), as well as a listing of any images or links in the text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Equation editor===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If either the [[MathJax filter|MathJax]] or the [[TeX notation filter|TeX notation]] filters are enabled (in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Filters &amp;gt; Manage filters&#039;&#039;) then an equation editor button is provided in the toolbar for launching the equation editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Table editor===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the administrator has enabled the extra settings for the Atto table editor (see below) then border styling, sizing and colours are available when creating a table:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttoTableRevised.png|center|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Keyboard shortcuts==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following keyboard shortcuts will work in the Atto text editor in most browsers. Note that for many of these commands to work you need to either click in the text editor or select content in the text editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Windows Command&lt;br /&gt;
! Mac Command&lt;br /&gt;
! Function&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + c&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + c&lt;br /&gt;
| Copy&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + v&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + v&lt;br /&gt;
| Paste&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Shift + v&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Shift + v&lt;br /&gt;
| Paste without formatting (very useful)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + x&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + x&lt;br /&gt;
| Cut&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + z&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + z&lt;br /&gt;
| Undo (careful - can undo a lot of text and doesn&#039;t always work)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + y&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + y&lt;br /&gt;
| Redo&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + a&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + a&lt;br /&gt;
| Select all&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Double-click&lt;br /&gt;
| Double-click&lt;br /&gt;
| Select word&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Triple-click&lt;br /&gt;
| Triple-click&lt;br /&gt;
| Select line&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + f&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + f&lt;br /&gt;
| Find on page&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| F3&lt;br /&gt;
| F3&lt;br /&gt;
| Find next&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Shift + F3&lt;br /&gt;
| Shift + F3&lt;br /&gt;
| Find previous&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + b&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + b&lt;br /&gt;
| Bold&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + i&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + i&lt;br /&gt;
| Italics&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + u&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + u&lt;br /&gt;
| Underline&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + k&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + k&lt;br /&gt;
| Insert/edit link&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Right arrow&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Right arrow&lt;br /&gt;
| Move to the end of the next word&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Left arrow&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Left arrow&lt;br /&gt;
| Move to the end of the previous word&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Shift + Right arrow&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Shift + Right arrow&lt;br /&gt;
| Select the next word or letter&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Shift + Left arrow&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Shift + Left arrow&lt;br /&gt;
| Select the previous word or letter&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Shift + Home&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Shift + Home&lt;br /&gt;
| Select from the cursor to the beginning of the page&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Shift + End&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Shift + End&lt;br /&gt;
| Select from the cursor to the end of the page&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Home&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Home&lt;br /&gt;
| Move to the beginning of the page&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + End&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + End&lt;br /&gt;
| Move to the end of the page&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Backspace&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Backspace&lt;br /&gt;
| Delete word or letter to the left&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Delete&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Delete&lt;br /&gt;
| Delete word or letter to the right&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl and +&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ and +&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom in (not specific to the editor, but very useful)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl and -&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ and -&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom out (not specific to the editor, but very useful)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl and 0&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ and 0&lt;br /&gt;
| Reset zoom (not specific to the editor, but very useful)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-size:80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Source: [https://confluence.royalroads.ca:8443/pages/viewpage.action?pageId=47778173 Jason 1keddie, Royal Roads University (Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike)]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Toolbar settings===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The administrator can specify which plugins to display and in which order from &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Text editors &amp;gt; Atto HTML editor &amp;gt; Atto toolbar settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:atto-plugins.png|thumb|center|450px|Atto Plugins]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Toolbar config table====&lt;br /&gt;
The toolbar is split into groups of related buttons. The format for the config setting is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
groupname1 = button1, button2, button3&lt;br /&gt;
groupname2 = button1, button2, button3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The group names on the left have no effect on how the toolbar works; they just need to be different for each button (and no spaces please). The list of buttons says which button goes in which group and in what order. The exact word to insert here for each button is listed in the &amp;quot;Toolbar config&amp;quot; column above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reason there are names for the groups is that it helps to make you think about how to group the buttons sensibly and not just stick new buttons in random locations. Ie. all the buttons in the &amp;quot;files&amp;quot; group interact with the file picker in some way&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding extra buttons===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Extra plugins (for example the contributed plugin &#039;Font color&#039;) may be added (once installed) by typing the toolbarconfig term into the toolbar config table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:toolbarconfig.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here for example are the available colours when &#039;fontcolor&#039; is added:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fontcolor.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The icons are displayed in related groups and the administrator can decide how many groups to display in the default collapsed state of the toolbar (that is, how many groups to display on Row 1).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Autosave frequency====&lt;br /&gt;
Text is automatically saved at regular intervals so it may be restored when the user returns to a form they had previously left. This setting allows the administrator to specify the time between autosaves. The default is one minute.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Non default Atto plugins ====&lt;br /&gt;
Not all plugins are enabled by default and the administrator of each site should give careful thought as to which plugins they choose to enable for their users. Here are some things to consider before enabling the non-default plugins:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Emoji picker =====&lt;br /&gt;
An emoji picker button may be added by typing &#039;emojipicker&#039; into the toolbar config table.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:toolbar with emoji picker.png|thumb|Toolbar with emoji picker button]]&lt;br /&gt;
To add the emoji picker button to the top row:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the line &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;emoji = emojipicker&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; under the line &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;files = image, emoticon, media, managefiles, recordrtc, h5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;Collapse toolbar settings&#039; and change &#039;Show first (n) groups when collapsed&#039; to 6 and save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Emoticons =====&lt;br /&gt;
The emoticon plugin inserts text representations of the emoticons in the content. The emoticon filter is responsible for converting these text sequences into proper smiley images. The emoticon filter is not enabled by default, which is why the emoticon plugin for Atto is not enabled by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== No-auto link =====&lt;br /&gt;
In general, the more plugins are added to the Atto toolbar, the harder it becomes to find specific plugins. Because the no-auto link plugin is not felt to be widely used it is not enabled by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Right to left =====&lt;br /&gt;
Because this plugin is only useful for courses where text needs to be written in a mixture of both &amp;quot;left to right&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;right to left&amp;quot; languages, it is not enabled by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Moodle plugins directory ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are more plugins available for Atto than just those included in a default install. &lt;br /&gt;
See the [https://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=category&amp;amp;id=53 Moodle plugins directory] for additional plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
Some example plugins include the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Background colour / Font colour ====&lt;br /&gt;
While these are very popular plugins, there are downsides to enabling their use on a site. Firstly - user specified colours may conflict visually with the site colours chosen by the theme designer. Even if the colours of the content do not conflict with the colours of the current theme, if the theme is changed in future, or the content is reused on a different site conflicts may be introduced. There are 2 possible types of conflicts, the first is just a visually unappealing combination of colours, the second is a combination of colours that may produce text that is hard to read for some people. It is preferable if the theme designer uses some interesting colours that meet the accessibility standards required for the site in the theme for the site, and the person creating the content simply uses the proper heading levels (for example) to make use of those styles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Cloze editor for Atto=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[Cloze editor for Atto|This]] is a plugin for easily making [[Embedded Answers (Cloze) question type]] questions inside the standard Moodle Atto text  editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Toggle preview =====&lt;br /&gt;
This plugin allows you view the content as it would be seen by a reader.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Chemistry plugins =====&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of chemistry plugins that support chemistry equations and structures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Text import plugins =====&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of plugins that support importing text from other sources. &lt;br /&gt;
The [https://moodle.org/plugins/view/atto_pastespecial Paste special] plugin minimises the amount of superfluous HTML markup&lt;br /&gt;
included when pasting content from an external editor such as Microsoft Word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [https://moodle.org/plugins/view/atto_wordimport Word Import] plugin (beta) supports importing an entire Word document, &lt;br /&gt;
including embedded images.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Equation editor settings===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Equation editor commands may be removed, added or reordered in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Text editors &amp;gt; Atto HTML editor &amp;gt; Equation editor settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:equationeditor.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Table editor settings===&lt;br /&gt;
Styles, colours and sizes for tables and their borders may be enabled from &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administraton &amp;gt;Plugins &amp;gt; Test editors &amp;gt; Atto HTML editor &amp;gt; Table settings.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Text editor FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Embedded files repository]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Word count quick guide]] - Word count is a plugin for the [[Text editor|Atto text editor]] which is used to create content within Moodle.  This plugin enables the author of text, such as a student,  to check how many words and letters are in a  piece of text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Language teaching]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text-Editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Editor de texto]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Éditeur de texte]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Atto_editor&amp;diff=139619</id>
		<title>Atto editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Atto_editor&amp;diff=139619"/>
		<updated>2021-02-08T08:59:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* Moodle plugins directory */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Editing text}}&lt;br /&gt;
==The Atto text editor==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Atto text editor (sometimes referred to as the &#039;HTML editor&#039;) has many icons to assist the user in entering content.  Many of these icons and functions should be familiar to anyone who uses a word processor.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some examples of where you will see the text editor include: Editing Section headings, description of an activity, writing an answer to a quiz question or editing the content of many blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default text editor in Moodle is the Atto editor, built specifically for Moodle. There is also a [[TinyMCE editor]] and a plain text editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Text editors can be enabled, disabled or a different one set to default from &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Text editors &amp;gt; Manage editors&#039;&#039;. The order of priority may also be specified here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If more than one text editor is enabled, users can select their preferred editor via their preferences page in the user menu (top right).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
{{MediaPlayer | url = https://youtu.be/fEtGcVz0pzE | desc = }}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Atto features==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Image copy and paste===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Moodle 3.9 onwards, images can be copied from anywhere and pasted into the Atto editor. For example, you can take a screenshot, copy it to your clipboard and then paste it into the Atto editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Image drag and drop===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your browser allows it (and if it does, you will see a message at the top of your screen when the editing is on) you can add images into the Atto editor simply by dragging them from your computer:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Attodragdrop29.png|thumb|600px|center|Drag an image directly into the editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Autosave===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Text typed into the Atto editor is automatically saved if you leave the page. The default of 60 seconds may be changed by the administrator in &#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Text editors&amp;gt;Atto HTML editor&amp;gt;Atto toolbar settings.&#039;&#039; If the user accidentally closes the tab or otherwise leaves the form without submitting, the text in the editor will be restored next time he opens the page. To discard  a restored draft, the  user needs to cancel the form or press the &amp;quot;Undo&amp;quot; button in the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AtttoAutosave.png|thumb|600px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Atto editor toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Attotopline1382.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Atto Row 1 default buttons&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 1. Expand&lt;br /&gt;
| 2. Style&lt;br /&gt;
| 3. Bold&lt;br /&gt;
| 4. Italic&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 5. Bulleted list&lt;br /&gt;
| 6. Numbered list&lt;br /&gt;
| 7. Add link&lt;br /&gt;
| 8. Unlink &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 9. Add image&lt;br /&gt;
| 10. Add smiley (if enabled)&lt;br /&gt;
| 11. Add media&lt;br /&gt;
| 12. Record audio&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 13. Record video&lt;br /&gt;
| 14. Manage embedded files&lt;br /&gt;
| 15. H5P&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Attobottomline.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Atto Row 2 default buttons&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 1. Underline&lt;br /&gt;
| 2. Strikethrough&lt;br /&gt;
| 3. Subscript&lt;br /&gt;
| 4. Superscript&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 5. Align left/centre/right&lt;br /&gt;
| 6. Decrease/increase indent&lt;br /&gt;
| 7. Equation editor&lt;br /&gt;
| 8. Special character&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 9. Table&lt;br /&gt;
| 10. Clear formatting&lt;br /&gt;
| 11. Undo/redo&lt;br /&gt;
| 12. Accessibility checker&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 13. Screenreader helper&lt;br /&gt;
| 14. HTML/code view&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Manage embedded files===&lt;br /&gt;
This allows users to add, delete or override files embedded in the current text area, for example in a label or topic summary. (It complements the [[Embedded files repository]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:26embeddefiles2.png|thumb|400px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Accessibility checker===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the tools available in the text editor is an automated [[Accessibility|accessibility]] checker which checks for some common errors in the text. These are usually things in the way the text is constructed that can prevent all users from having equal access to information and functionality. The list of problems that the accessibility checker looks for is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Images with missing or empty alt text (unless they have the presentation role)&lt;br /&gt;
* Contrast of font colour and background colour meets [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Web_Content_Accessibility_Guidelines WCAG AA guidelines]&lt;br /&gt;
* Long blocks of text are sufficiently broken up into headings&lt;br /&gt;
* All tables require captions&lt;br /&gt;
* Tables should not contain merged cells as they are difficult to navigate with screen readers&lt;br /&gt;
* All tables should contain row or column headers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Screenreader helper===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Screen readers basically treat a content editable region like a text box - which is wrong, because it can contain images, links and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen reader helper provides additional information about the currently selected text (e.g. is it bold), as well as a listing of any images or links in the text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Equation editor===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If either the [[MathJax filter|MathJax]] or the [[TeX notation filter|TeX notation]] filters are enabled (in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Filters &amp;gt; Manage filters&#039;&#039;) then an equation editor button is provided in the toolbar for launching the equation editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Table editor===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the administrator has enabled the extra settings for the Atto table editor (see below) then border styling, sizing and colours are available when creating a table:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttoTableRevised.png|center|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Keyboard shortcuts==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following keyboard shortcuts will work in the Atto text editor in most browsers. Note that for many of these commands to work you need to either click in the text editor or select content in the text editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Windows Command&lt;br /&gt;
! Mac Command&lt;br /&gt;
! Function&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + c&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + c&lt;br /&gt;
| Copy&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + v&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + v&lt;br /&gt;
| Paste&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Shift + v&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Shift + v&lt;br /&gt;
| Paste without formatting (very useful)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + x&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + x&lt;br /&gt;
| Cut&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + z&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + z&lt;br /&gt;
| Undo (careful - can undo a lot of text and doesn&#039;t always work)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + y&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + y&lt;br /&gt;
| Redo&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + a&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + a&lt;br /&gt;
| Select all&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Double-click&lt;br /&gt;
| Double-click&lt;br /&gt;
| Select word&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Triple-click&lt;br /&gt;
| Triple-click&lt;br /&gt;
| Select line&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + f&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + f&lt;br /&gt;
| Find on page&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| F3&lt;br /&gt;
| F3&lt;br /&gt;
| Find next&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Shift + F3&lt;br /&gt;
| Shift + F3&lt;br /&gt;
| Find previous&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + b&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + b&lt;br /&gt;
| Bold&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + i&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + i&lt;br /&gt;
| Italics&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + u&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + u&lt;br /&gt;
| Underline&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + k&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + k&lt;br /&gt;
| Insert/edit link&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Right arrow&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Right arrow&lt;br /&gt;
| Move to the end of the next word&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Left arrow&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Left arrow&lt;br /&gt;
| Move to the end of the previous word&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Shift + Right arrow&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Shift + Right arrow&lt;br /&gt;
| Select the next word or letter&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Shift + Left arrow&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Shift + Left arrow&lt;br /&gt;
| Select the previous word or letter&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Shift + Home&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Shift + Home&lt;br /&gt;
| Select from the cursor to the beginning of the page&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Shift + End&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Shift + End&lt;br /&gt;
| Select from the cursor to the end of the page&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Home&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Home&lt;br /&gt;
| Move to the beginning of the page&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + End&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + End&lt;br /&gt;
| Move to the end of the page&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Backspace&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Backspace&lt;br /&gt;
| Delete word or letter to the left&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Delete&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Delete&lt;br /&gt;
| Delete word or letter to the right&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl and +&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ and +&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom in (not specific to the editor, but very useful)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl and -&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ and -&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom out (not specific to the editor, but very useful)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl and 0&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ and 0&lt;br /&gt;
| Reset zoom (not specific to the editor, but very useful)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-size:80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Source: [https://confluence.royalroads.ca:8443/pages/viewpage.action?pageId=47778173 Jason 1keddie, Royal Roads University (Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike)]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Toolbar settings===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The administrator can specify which plugins to display and in which order from &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Text editors &amp;gt; Atto HTML editor &amp;gt; Atto toolbar settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:atto-plugins.png|thumb|center|450px|Atto Plugins]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Toolbar config table====&lt;br /&gt;
The toolbar is split into groups of related buttons. The format for the config setting is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
groupname1 = button1, button2, button3&lt;br /&gt;
groupname2 = button1, button2, button3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The group names on the left have no effect on how the toolbar works; they just need to be different for each button (and no spaces please). The list of buttons says which button goes in which group and in what order. The exact word to insert here for each button is listed in the &amp;quot;Toolbar config&amp;quot; column above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reason there are names for the groups is that it helps to make you think about how to group the buttons sensibly and not just stick new buttons in random locations. Ie. all the buttons in the &amp;quot;files&amp;quot; group interact with the file picker in some way&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding extra buttons===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Extra plugins from the list (for example &#039;Font color&#039;) may be added by typing the toolbarconfig term into the toolbar config table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:toolbarconfig.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here for example are the available colours when &#039;fontcolor&#039; is added:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fontcolor.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The icons are displayed in related groups and the administrator can decide how many groups to display in the default collapsed state of the toolbar (that is, how many groups to display on Row 1).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Autosave frequency====&lt;br /&gt;
Text is automatically saved at regular intervals so it may be restored when the user returns to a form they had previously left. This setting allows the administrator to specify the time between autosaves. The default is one minute.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Non default Atto plugins ====&lt;br /&gt;
Not all plugins are enabled by default and the administrator of each site should give careful thought as to which plugins they choose to enable for their users. Here are some things to consider before enabling the non-default plugins:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Emoji picker =====&lt;br /&gt;
An emoji picker button may be added by typing &#039;emojipicker&#039; into the toolbar config table.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:toolbar with emoji picker.png|thumb|Toolbar with emoji picker button]]&lt;br /&gt;
To add the emoji picker button to the top row:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the line &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;emoji = emojipicker&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; under the line &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;files = image, emoticon, media, managefiles, recordrtc, h5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;Collapse toolbar settings&#039; and change &#039;Show first (n) groups when collapsed&#039; to 6 and save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Emoticons =====&lt;br /&gt;
The emoticon plugin inserts text representations of the emoticons in the content. The emoticon filter is responsible for converting these text sequences into proper smiley images. The emoticon filter is not enabled by default, which is why the emoticon plugin for Atto is not enabled by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== No-auto link =====&lt;br /&gt;
In general, the more plugins are added to the Atto toolbar, the harder it becomes to find specific plugins. Because the no-auto link plugin is not felt to be widely used it is not enabled by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Right to left =====&lt;br /&gt;
Because this plugin is only useful for courses where text needs to be written in a mixture of both &amp;quot;left to right&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;right to left&amp;quot; languages, it is not enabled by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Moodle plugins directory ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are more plugins available for Atto than just those included in a default install. &lt;br /&gt;
See the [https://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=category&amp;amp;id=53 Moodle plugins directory] for additional plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
Some example plugins include the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Background colour / Font colour ====&lt;br /&gt;
While these are very popular plugins, there are downsides to enabling their use on a site. Firstly - user specified colours may conflict visually with the site colours chosen by the theme designer. Even if the colours of the content do not conflict with the colours of the current theme, if the theme is changed in future, or the content is reused on a different site conflicts may be introduced. There are 2 possible types of conflicts, the first is just a visually unappealing combination of colours, the second is a combination of colours that may produce text that is hard to read for some people. It is preferable if the theme designer uses some interesting colours that meet the accessibility standards required for the site in the theme for the site, and the person creating the content simply uses the proper heading levels (for example) to make use of those styles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Cloze editor for Atto=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[Cloze editor for Atto|This]] is a plugin for easily making [[Embedded Answers (Cloze) question type]] questions inside the standard Moodle Atto text  editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Toggle preview =====&lt;br /&gt;
This plugin allows you view the content as it would be seen by a reader.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Chemistry plugins =====&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of chemistry plugins that support chemistry equations and structures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Text import plugins =====&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of plugins that support importing text from other sources. &lt;br /&gt;
The [https://moodle.org/plugins/view/atto_pastespecial Paste special] plugin minimises the amount of superfluous HTML markup&lt;br /&gt;
included when pasting content from an external editor such as Microsoft Word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [https://moodle.org/plugins/view/atto_wordimport Word Import] plugin (beta) supports importing an entire Word document, &lt;br /&gt;
including embedded images.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Equation editor settings===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Equation editor commands may be removed, added or reordered in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Text editors &amp;gt; Atto HTML editor &amp;gt; Equation editor settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:equationeditor.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Table editor settings===&lt;br /&gt;
Styles, colours and sizes for tables and their borders may be enabled from &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administraton &amp;gt;Plugins &amp;gt; Test editors &amp;gt; Atto HTML editor &amp;gt; Table settings.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Text editor FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Embedded files repository]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Word count quick guide]] - Word count is a plugin for the [[Text editor|Atto text editor]] which is used to create content within Moodle.  This plugin enables the author of text, such as a student,  to check how many words and letters are in a  piece of text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Language teaching]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text-Editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Editor de texto]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Éditeur de texte]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Atto_editor&amp;diff=139618</id>
		<title>Atto editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Atto_editor&amp;diff=139618"/>
		<updated>2021-02-08T08:59:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* Background colour / Font colour */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Editing text}}&lt;br /&gt;
==The Atto text editor==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Atto text editor (sometimes referred to as the &#039;HTML editor&#039;) has many icons to assist the user in entering content.  Many of these icons and functions should be familiar to anyone who uses a word processor.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some examples of where you will see the text editor include: Editing Section headings, description of an activity, writing an answer to a quiz question or editing the content of many blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default text editor in Moodle is the Atto editor, built specifically for Moodle. There is also a [[TinyMCE editor]] and a plain text editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Text editors can be enabled, disabled or a different one set to default from &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Text editors &amp;gt; Manage editors&#039;&#039;. The order of priority may also be specified here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If more than one text editor is enabled, users can select their preferred editor via their preferences page in the user menu (top right).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
{{MediaPlayer | url = https://youtu.be/fEtGcVz0pzE | desc = }}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Atto features==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Image copy and paste===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Moodle 3.9 onwards, images can be copied from anywhere and pasted into the Atto editor. For example, you can take a screenshot, copy it to your clipboard and then paste it into the Atto editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Image drag and drop===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your browser allows it (and if it does, you will see a message at the top of your screen when the editing is on) you can add images into the Atto editor simply by dragging them from your computer:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Attodragdrop29.png|thumb|600px|center|Drag an image directly into the editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Autosave===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Text typed into the Atto editor is automatically saved if you leave the page. The default of 60 seconds may be changed by the administrator in &#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Text editors&amp;gt;Atto HTML editor&amp;gt;Atto toolbar settings.&#039;&#039; If the user accidentally closes the tab or otherwise leaves the form without submitting, the text in the editor will be restored next time he opens the page. To discard  a restored draft, the  user needs to cancel the form or press the &amp;quot;Undo&amp;quot; button in the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AtttoAutosave.png|thumb|600px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Atto editor toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Attotopline1382.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Atto Row 1 default buttons&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 1. Expand&lt;br /&gt;
| 2. Style&lt;br /&gt;
| 3. Bold&lt;br /&gt;
| 4. Italic&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 5. Bulleted list&lt;br /&gt;
| 6. Numbered list&lt;br /&gt;
| 7. Add link&lt;br /&gt;
| 8. Unlink &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 9. Add image&lt;br /&gt;
| 10. Add smiley (if enabled)&lt;br /&gt;
| 11. Add media&lt;br /&gt;
| 12. Record audio&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 13. Record video&lt;br /&gt;
| 14. Manage embedded files&lt;br /&gt;
| 15. H5P&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Attobottomline.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Atto Row 2 default buttons&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 1. Underline&lt;br /&gt;
| 2. Strikethrough&lt;br /&gt;
| 3. Subscript&lt;br /&gt;
| 4. Superscript&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 5. Align left/centre/right&lt;br /&gt;
| 6. Decrease/increase indent&lt;br /&gt;
| 7. Equation editor&lt;br /&gt;
| 8. Special character&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 9. Table&lt;br /&gt;
| 10. Clear formatting&lt;br /&gt;
| 11. Undo/redo&lt;br /&gt;
| 12. Accessibility checker&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 13. Screenreader helper&lt;br /&gt;
| 14. HTML/code view&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Manage embedded files===&lt;br /&gt;
This allows users to add, delete or override files embedded in the current text area, for example in a label or topic summary. (It complements the [[Embedded files repository]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:26embeddefiles2.png|thumb|400px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Accessibility checker===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the tools available in the text editor is an automated [[Accessibility|accessibility]] checker which checks for some common errors in the text. These are usually things in the way the text is constructed that can prevent all users from having equal access to information and functionality. The list of problems that the accessibility checker looks for is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Images with missing or empty alt text (unless they have the presentation role)&lt;br /&gt;
* Contrast of font colour and background colour meets [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Web_Content_Accessibility_Guidelines WCAG AA guidelines]&lt;br /&gt;
* Long blocks of text are sufficiently broken up into headings&lt;br /&gt;
* All tables require captions&lt;br /&gt;
* Tables should not contain merged cells as they are difficult to navigate with screen readers&lt;br /&gt;
* All tables should contain row or column headers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Screenreader helper===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Screen readers basically treat a content editable region like a text box - which is wrong, because it can contain images, links and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen reader helper provides additional information about the currently selected text (e.g. is it bold), as well as a listing of any images or links in the text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Equation editor===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If either the [[MathJax filter|MathJax]] or the [[TeX notation filter|TeX notation]] filters are enabled (in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Filters &amp;gt; Manage filters&#039;&#039;) then an equation editor button is provided in the toolbar for launching the equation editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Table editor===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the administrator has enabled the extra settings for the Atto table editor (see below) then border styling, sizing and colours are available when creating a table:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttoTableRevised.png|center|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Keyboard shortcuts==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following keyboard shortcuts will work in the Atto text editor in most browsers. Note that for many of these commands to work you need to either click in the text editor or select content in the text editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Windows Command&lt;br /&gt;
! Mac Command&lt;br /&gt;
! Function&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + c&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + c&lt;br /&gt;
| Copy&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + v&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + v&lt;br /&gt;
| Paste&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Shift + v&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Shift + v&lt;br /&gt;
| Paste without formatting (very useful)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + x&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + x&lt;br /&gt;
| Cut&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + z&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + z&lt;br /&gt;
| Undo (careful - can undo a lot of text and doesn&#039;t always work)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + y&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + y&lt;br /&gt;
| Redo&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + a&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + a&lt;br /&gt;
| Select all&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Double-click&lt;br /&gt;
| Double-click&lt;br /&gt;
| Select word&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Triple-click&lt;br /&gt;
| Triple-click&lt;br /&gt;
| Select line&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + f&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + f&lt;br /&gt;
| Find on page&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| F3&lt;br /&gt;
| F3&lt;br /&gt;
| Find next&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Shift + F3&lt;br /&gt;
| Shift + F3&lt;br /&gt;
| Find previous&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + b&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + b&lt;br /&gt;
| Bold&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + i&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + i&lt;br /&gt;
| Italics&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + u&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + u&lt;br /&gt;
| Underline&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + k&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + k&lt;br /&gt;
| Insert/edit link&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Right arrow&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Right arrow&lt;br /&gt;
| Move to the end of the next word&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Left arrow&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Left arrow&lt;br /&gt;
| Move to the end of the previous word&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Shift + Right arrow&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Shift + Right arrow&lt;br /&gt;
| Select the next word or letter&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Shift + Left arrow&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Shift + Left arrow&lt;br /&gt;
| Select the previous word or letter&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Shift + Home&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Shift + Home&lt;br /&gt;
| Select from the cursor to the beginning of the page&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Shift + End&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Shift + End&lt;br /&gt;
| Select from the cursor to the end of the page&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Home&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Home&lt;br /&gt;
| Move to the beginning of the page&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + End&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + End&lt;br /&gt;
| Move to the end of the page&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Backspace&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Backspace&lt;br /&gt;
| Delete word or letter to the left&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Delete&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Delete&lt;br /&gt;
| Delete word or letter to the right&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl and +&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ and +&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom in (not specific to the editor, but very useful)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl and -&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ and -&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom out (not specific to the editor, but very useful)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl and 0&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ and 0&lt;br /&gt;
| Reset zoom (not specific to the editor, but very useful)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-size:80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Source: [https://confluence.royalroads.ca:8443/pages/viewpage.action?pageId=47778173 Jason 1keddie, Royal Roads University (Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike)]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Toolbar settings===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The administrator can specify which plugins to display and in which order from &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Text editors &amp;gt; Atto HTML editor &amp;gt; Atto toolbar settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:atto-plugins.png|thumb|center|450px|Atto Plugins]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Toolbar config table====&lt;br /&gt;
The toolbar is split into groups of related buttons. The format for the config setting is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
groupname1 = button1, button2, button3&lt;br /&gt;
groupname2 = button1, button2, button3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The group names on the left have no effect on how the toolbar works; they just need to be different for each button (and no spaces please). The list of buttons says which button goes in which group and in what order. The exact word to insert here for each button is listed in the &amp;quot;Toolbar config&amp;quot; column above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reason there are names for the groups is that it helps to make you think about how to group the buttons sensibly and not just stick new buttons in random locations. Ie. all the buttons in the &amp;quot;files&amp;quot; group interact with the file picker in some way&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding extra buttons===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Extra plugins from the list (for example &#039;Font color&#039;) may be added by typing the toolbarconfig term into the toolbar config table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:toolbarconfig.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here for example are the available colours when &#039;fontcolor&#039; is added:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fontcolor.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The icons are displayed in related groups and the administrator can decide how many groups to display in the default collapsed state of the toolbar (that is, how many groups to display on Row 1).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Autosave frequency====&lt;br /&gt;
Text is automatically saved at regular intervals so it may be restored when the user returns to a form they had previously left. This setting allows the administrator to specify the time between autosaves. The default is one minute.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Non default Atto plugins ====&lt;br /&gt;
Not all plugins are enabled by default and the administrator of each site should give careful thought as to which plugins they choose to enable for their users. Here are some things to consider before enabling the non-default plugins:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Emoji picker =====&lt;br /&gt;
An emoji picker button may be added by typing &#039;emojipicker&#039; into the toolbar config table.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:toolbar with emoji picker.png|thumb|Toolbar with emoji picker button]]&lt;br /&gt;
To add the emoji picker button to the top row:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the line &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;emoji = emojipicker&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; under the line &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;files = image, emoticon, media, managefiles, recordrtc, h5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;Collapse toolbar settings&#039; and change &#039;Show first (n) groups when collapsed&#039; to 6 and save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Emoticons =====&lt;br /&gt;
The emoticon plugin inserts text representations of the emoticons in the content. The emoticon filter is responsible for converting these text sequences into proper smiley images. The emoticon filter is not enabled by default, which is why the emoticon plugin for Atto is not enabled by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== No-auto link =====&lt;br /&gt;
In general, the more plugins are added to the Atto toolbar, the harder it becomes to find specific plugins. Because the no-auto link plugin is not felt to be widely used it is not enabled by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Right to left =====&lt;br /&gt;
Because this plugin is only useful for courses where text needs to be written in a mixture of both &amp;quot;left to right&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;right to left&amp;quot; languages, it is not enabled by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Moodle plugins directory ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are more plugins available for Atto than just those included in a default install. &lt;br /&gt;
See the [https://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=category&amp;amp;id=53 Moodle plugins directory] for additional plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
Some example plugins include the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Cloze editor for Atto=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[Cloze editor for Atto|This]] is a plugin for easily making [[Embedded Answers (Cloze) question type]] questions inside the standard Moodle Atto text  editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Toggle preview =====&lt;br /&gt;
This plugin allows you view the content as it would be seen by a reader.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Chemistry plugins =====&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of chemistry plugins that support chemistry equations and structures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Text import plugins =====&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of plugins that support importing text from other sources. &lt;br /&gt;
The [https://moodle.org/plugins/view/atto_pastespecial Paste special] plugin minimises the amount of superfluous HTML markup&lt;br /&gt;
included when pasting content from an external editor such as Microsoft Word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [https://moodle.org/plugins/view/atto_wordimport Word Import] plugin (beta) supports importing an entire Word document, &lt;br /&gt;
including embedded images.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Equation editor settings===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Equation editor commands may be removed, added or reordered in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Text editors &amp;gt; Atto HTML editor &amp;gt; Equation editor settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:equationeditor.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Table editor settings===&lt;br /&gt;
Styles, colours and sizes for tables and their borders may be enabled from &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administraton &amp;gt;Plugins &amp;gt; Test editors &amp;gt; Atto HTML editor &amp;gt; Table settings.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Text editor FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Embedded files repository]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Word count quick guide]] - Word count is a plugin for the [[Text editor|Atto text editor]] which is used to create content within Moodle.  This plugin enables the author of text, such as a student,  to check how many words and letters are in a  piece of text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Language teaching]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text-Editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Editor de texto]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Éditeur de texte]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Atto_editor&amp;diff=139617</id>
		<title>Atto editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Atto_editor&amp;diff=139617"/>
		<updated>2021-02-08T08:58:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Editing text}}&lt;br /&gt;
==The Atto text editor==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Atto text editor (sometimes referred to as the &#039;HTML editor&#039;) has many icons to assist the user in entering content.  Many of these icons and functions should be familiar to anyone who uses a word processor.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some examples of where you will see the text editor include: Editing Section headings, description of an activity, writing an answer to a quiz question or editing the content of many blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default text editor in Moodle is the Atto editor, built specifically for Moodle. There is also a [[TinyMCE editor]] and a plain text editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Text editors can be enabled, disabled or a different one set to default from &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Text editors &amp;gt; Manage editors&#039;&#039;. The order of priority may also be specified here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If more than one text editor is enabled, users can select their preferred editor via their preferences page in the user menu (top right).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
{{MediaPlayer | url = https://youtu.be/fEtGcVz0pzE | desc = }}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Atto features==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Image copy and paste===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Moodle 3.9 onwards, images can be copied from anywhere and pasted into the Atto editor. For example, you can take a screenshot, copy it to your clipboard and then paste it into the Atto editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Image drag and drop===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your browser allows it (and if it does, you will see a message at the top of your screen when the editing is on) you can add images into the Atto editor simply by dragging them from your computer:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Attodragdrop29.png|thumb|600px|center|Drag an image directly into the editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Autosave===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Text typed into the Atto editor is automatically saved if you leave the page. The default of 60 seconds may be changed by the administrator in &#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Text editors&amp;gt;Atto HTML editor&amp;gt;Atto toolbar settings.&#039;&#039; If the user accidentally closes the tab or otherwise leaves the form without submitting, the text in the editor will be restored next time he opens the page. To discard  a restored draft, the  user needs to cancel the form or press the &amp;quot;Undo&amp;quot; button in the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AtttoAutosave.png|thumb|600px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Atto editor toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Attotopline1382.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Atto Row 1 default buttons&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 1. Expand&lt;br /&gt;
| 2. Style&lt;br /&gt;
| 3. Bold&lt;br /&gt;
| 4. Italic&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 5. Bulleted list&lt;br /&gt;
| 6. Numbered list&lt;br /&gt;
| 7. Add link&lt;br /&gt;
| 8. Unlink &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 9. Add image&lt;br /&gt;
| 10. Add smiley (if enabled)&lt;br /&gt;
| 11. Add media&lt;br /&gt;
| 12. Record audio&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 13. Record video&lt;br /&gt;
| 14. Manage embedded files&lt;br /&gt;
| 15. H5P&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Attobottomline.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Atto Row 2 default buttons&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 1. Underline&lt;br /&gt;
| 2. Strikethrough&lt;br /&gt;
| 3. Subscript&lt;br /&gt;
| 4. Superscript&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 5. Align left/centre/right&lt;br /&gt;
| 6. Decrease/increase indent&lt;br /&gt;
| 7. Equation editor&lt;br /&gt;
| 8. Special character&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 9. Table&lt;br /&gt;
| 10. Clear formatting&lt;br /&gt;
| 11. Undo/redo&lt;br /&gt;
| 12. Accessibility checker&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 13. Screenreader helper&lt;br /&gt;
| 14. HTML/code view&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Manage embedded files===&lt;br /&gt;
This allows users to add, delete or override files embedded in the current text area, for example in a label or topic summary. (It complements the [[Embedded files repository]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:26embeddefiles2.png|thumb|400px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Accessibility checker===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the tools available in the text editor is an automated [[Accessibility|accessibility]] checker which checks for some common errors in the text. These are usually things in the way the text is constructed that can prevent all users from having equal access to information and functionality. The list of problems that the accessibility checker looks for is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Images with missing or empty alt text (unless they have the presentation role)&lt;br /&gt;
* Contrast of font colour and background colour meets [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Web_Content_Accessibility_Guidelines WCAG AA guidelines]&lt;br /&gt;
* Long blocks of text are sufficiently broken up into headings&lt;br /&gt;
* All tables require captions&lt;br /&gt;
* Tables should not contain merged cells as they are difficult to navigate with screen readers&lt;br /&gt;
* All tables should contain row or column headers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Screenreader helper===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Screen readers basically treat a content editable region like a text box - which is wrong, because it can contain images, links and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen reader helper provides additional information about the currently selected text (e.g. is it bold), as well as a listing of any images or links in the text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Equation editor===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If either the [[MathJax filter|MathJax]] or the [[TeX notation filter|TeX notation]] filters are enabled (in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Filters &amp;gt; Manage filters&#039;&#039;) then an equation editor button is provided in the toolbar for launching the equation editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Table editor===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the administrator has enabled the extra settings for the Atto table editor (see below) then border styling, sizing and colours are available when creating a table:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttoTableRevised.png|center|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Keyboard shortcuts==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following keyboard shortcuts will work in the Atto text editor in most browsers. Note that for many of these commands to work you need to either click in the text editor or select content in the text editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Windows Command&lt;br /&gt;
! Mac Command&lt;br /&gt;
! Function&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + c&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + c&lt;br /&gt;
| Copy&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + v&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + v&lt;br /&gt;
| Paste&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Shift + v&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Shift + v&lt;br /&gt;
| Paste without formatting (very useful)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + x&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + x&lt;br /&gt;
| Cut&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + z&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + z&lt;br /&gt;
| Undo (careful - can undo a lot of text and doesn&#039;t always work)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + y&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + y&lt;br /&gt;
| Redo&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + a&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + a&lt;br /&gt;
| Select all&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Double-click&lt;br /&gt;
| Double-click&lt;br /&gt;
| Select word&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Triple-click&lt;br /&gt;
| Triple-click&lt;br /&gt;
| Select line&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + f&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + f&lt;br /&gt;
| Find on page&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| F3&lt;br /&gt;
| F3&lt;br /&gt;
| Find next&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Shift + F3&lt;br /&gt;
| Shift + F3&lt;br /&gt;
| Find previous&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + b&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + b&lt;br /&gt;
| Bold&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + i&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + i&lt;br /&gt;
| Italics&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + u&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + u&lt;br /&gt;
| Underline&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + k&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + k&lt;br /&gt;
| Insert/edit link&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Right arrow&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Right arrow&lt;br /&gt;
| Move to the end of the next word&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Left arrow&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Left arrow&lt;br /&gt;
| Move to the end of the previous word&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Shift + Right arrow&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Shift + Right arrow&lt;br /&gt;
| Select the next word or letter&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Shift + Left arrow&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Shift + Left arrow&lt;br /&gt;
| Select the previous word or letter&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Shift + Home&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Shift + Home&lt;br /&gt;
| Select from the cursor to the beginning of the page&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Shift + End&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Shift + End&lt;br /&gt;
| Select from the cursor to the end of the page&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Home&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Home&lt;br /&gt;
| Move to the beginning of the page&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + End&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + End&lt;br /&gt;
| Move to the end of the page&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Backspace&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Backspace&lt;br /&gt;
| Delete word or letter to the left&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl + Delete&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ + Delete&lt;br /&gt;
| Delete word or letter to the right&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl and +&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ and +&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom in (not specific to the editor, but very useful)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl and -&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ and -&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom out (not specific to the editor, but very useful)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ctrl and 0&lt;br /&gt;
| ⌘ and 0&lt;br /&gt;
| Reset zoom (not specific to the editor, but very useful)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-size:80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Source: [https://confluence.royalroads.ca:8443/pages/viewpage.action?pageId=47778173 Jason 1keddie, Royal Roads University (Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike)]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Toolbar settings===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The administrator can specify which plugins to display and in which order from &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Text editors &amp;gt; Atto HTML editor &amp;gt; Atto toolbar settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:atto-plugins.png|thumb|center|450px|Atto Plugins]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Toolbar config table====&lt;br /&gt;
The toolbar is split into groups of related buttons. The format for the config setting is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
groupname1 = button1, button2, button3&lt;br /&gt;
groupname2 = button1, button2, button3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The group names on the left have no effect on how the toolbar works; they just need to be different for each button (and no spaces please). The list of buttons says which button goes in which group and in what order. The exact word to insert here for each button is listed in the &amp;quot;Toolbar config&amp;quot; column above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reason there are names for the groups is that it helps to make you think about how to group the buttons sensibly and not just stick new buttons in random locations. Ie. all the buttons in the &amp;quot;files&amp;quot; group interact with the file picker in some way&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding extra buttons===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Extra plugins from the list (for example &#039;Font color&#039;) may be added by typing the toolbarconfig term into the toolbar config table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:toolbarconfig.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here for example are the available colours when &#039;fontcolor&#039; is added:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fontcolor.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The icons are displayed in related groups and the administrator can decide how many groups to display in the default collapsed state of the toolbar (that is, how many groups to display on Row 1).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Autosave frequency====&lt;br /&gt;
Text is automatically saved at regular intervals so it may be restored when the user returns to a form they had previously left. This setting allows the administrator to specify the time between autosaves. The default is one minute.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Non default Atto plugins ====&lt;br /&gt;
Not all plugins are enabled by default and the administrator of each site should give careful thought as to which plugins they choose to enable for their users. Here are some things to consider before enabling the non-default plugins:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Background colour / Font colour =====&lt;br /&gt;
While these are very popular plugins, there are downsides to enabling their use on a site. Firstly - user specified colours may conflict visually with the site colours chosen by the theme designer. Even if the colours of the content do not conflict with the colours of the current theme, if the theme is changed in future, or the content is reused on a different site conflicts may be introduced. There are 2 possible types of conflicts, the first is just a visually unappealing combination of colours, the second is a combination of colours that may produce text that is hard to read for some people. It is preferable if the theme designer uses some interesting colours that meet the accessibility standards required for the site in the theme for the site, and the person creating the content simply uses the proper heading levels (for example) to make use of those styles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Emoji picker =====&lt;br /&gt;
An emoji picker button may be added by typing &#039;emojipicker&#039; into the toolbar config table.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:toolbar with emoji picker.png|thumb|Toolbar with emoji picker button]]&lt;br /&gt;
To add the emoji picker button to the top row:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the line &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;emoji = emojipicker&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; under the line &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;files = image, emoticon, media, managefiles, recordrtc, h5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;Collapse toolbar settings&#039; and change &#039;Show first (n) groups when collapsed&#039; to 6 and save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Emoticons =====&lt;br /&gt;
The emoticon plugin inserts text representations of the emoticons in the content. The emoticon filter is responsible for converting these text sequences into proper smiley images. The emoticon filter is not enabled by default, which is why the emoticon plugin for Atto is not enabled by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== No-auto link =====&lt;br /&gt;
In general, the more plugins are added to the Atto toolbar, the harder it becomes to find specific plugins. Because the no-auto link plugin is not felt to be widely used it is not enabled by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Right to left =====&lt;br /&gt;
Because this plugin is only useful for courses where text needs to be written in a mixture of both &amp;quot;left to right&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;right to left&amp;quot; languages, it is not enabled by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Moodle plugins directory ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are more plugins available for Atto than just those included in a default install. &lt;br /&gt;
See the [https://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=category&amp;amp;id=53 Moodle plugins directory] for additional plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
Some example plugins include the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Cloze editor for Atto=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[Cloze editor for Atto|This]] is a plugin for easily making [[Embedded Answers (Cloze) question type]] questions inside the standard Moodle Atto text  editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Toggle preview =====&lt;br /&gt;
This plugin allows you view the content as it would be seen by a reader.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Chemistry plugins =====&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of chemistry plugins that support chemistry equations and structures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Text import plugins =====&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of plugins that support importing text from other sources. &lt;br /&gt;
The [https://moodle.org/plugins/view/atto_pastespecial Paste special] plugin minimises the amount of superfluous HTML markup&lt;br /&gt;
included when pasting content from an external editor such as Microsoft Word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [https://moodle.org/plugins/view/atto_wordimport Word Import] plugin (beta) supports importing an entire Word document, &lt;br /&gt;
including embedded images.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Equation editor settings===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Equation editor commands may be removed, added or reordered in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Text editors &amp;gt; Atto HTML editor &amp;gt; Equation editor settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:equationeditor.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Table editor settings===&lt;br /&gt;
Styles, colours and sizes for tables and their borders may be enabled from &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administraton &amp;gt;Plugins &amp;gt; Test editors &amp;gt; Atto HTML editor &amp;gt; Table settings.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Text editor FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Embedded files repository]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Word count quick guide]] - Word count is a plugin for the [[Text editor|Atto text editor]] which is used to create content within Moodle.  This plugin enables the author of text, such as a student,  to check how many words and letters are in a  piece of text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Language teaching]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text-Editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Editor de texto]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Éditeur de texte]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>